JP2016221175A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To prevent a failure from occurring even when simultaneous variation is performed.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured such that continuous performance can be executed that suggests a determination result of a specific first start storage on the basis of a determination result of prior determination means (game control device 100) over a plurality of variable display games until a first variable display game based on the specific first start storage, and furthermore, when a determination is made during the execution of the continuous performance that after the first variable display game is interrupted and a special game state based on a second variable display game finishes, resumption control to resume the interrupted first variable display game is to be performed, the continuous performance can be finished before the first variable display game is interrupted.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 123

Description

  The present invention converts a variable winning device from a closed state to an open state when a result of a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner based on winning of a game ball at a start winning opening is a special result. The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state capable of giving a player a gaming value.

  In conventional gaming machines, special figure 2 is executed preferentially over special figure 1 (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2010-99315 A

  However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem when simultaneous fluctuations are performed. An object of the present invention is to prevent a problem from occurring even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
When the result of a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information variably based on the winning of a game ball at the starting winning opening results in a special result, the variable winning device is changed from the closed state to the open state to play the game In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state capable of giving value,
The start prize opening includes a first start prize opening and a second start prize opening arranged at a position different from the first start prize opening,
First variation display means capable of displaying a first variation display game based on winning of a game ball in the first start winning opening;
Second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game based on winning of a game ball in the second start winning opening;
First start storage means capable of storing a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number based on winning of a game ball in the first start winning opening;
Based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means, a first determination that can determine the result and the variation mode information of the first variation display game at the start of the first variation display game Means,
First variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game based on a determination result of the first determination means;
Pre-determination means for determining the first start memory stored in the first start storage means before the execution of the first variation display game based on the first start memory;
Second determination means capable of determining the result and the variation mode information of the second variation display game at the start of the second variation display game based on the winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening. When,
Second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game based on a determination result of the second determination means;
Production control means for controlling production in the game;
When one of the first variation display game execution control means and the second variation display game execution control means performs execution control of one variation display game, the other variation display game When the other variation display game whose execution is controlled by the game execution control means has the special result, the one variation display game is interrupted and the special game state based on the other variation display game is Resumption control means capable of executing resumption control for resuming the one variation display game that has been suspended after the completion,
The production control means includes
A continuous effect that suggests the determination result of the specific first start memory over a plurality of variable display games up to the first variable display game based on the specific first start memory based on the determination result of the prior determination means. Is possible and
During the execution of the continuous effect, if it is determined that the restart control by the restart control means is performed for the first variable display game, the continuous effect is ended before the interruption of the first variable display game. It is possible to make it possible.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, there is no contradiction in production, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed.

The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The production control means includes
When it is determined that the resumption control by the resumption control means is performed for the first variation display game during the execution of the continuous effect, by the start of the first variation display game for which the resumption control is performed. The continuous production can be ended.

  According to the second aspect of the present invention, there is no contradiction in production, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed.

The invention according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
A start memory display means for displaying a start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored in the first start memory means;
The start memory display means includes
It is possible to make a pending change notice that is a notice suggesting a determination result of the prior determination means for the first start memory corresponding to the start memory display,
Even if the resumption control is performed by the resumption control means, the hold change notice can be continuously executed.

  According to the third aspect of the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest by continuing the pending change notice that is not affected by the interruption.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring even when simultaneous variation is performed.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the structure of a collective display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 1 indicator. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 indicator. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 indicator. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of a special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of a special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a change in the number of abnormal fluctuations. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an abnormal change notification is performed. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port 1 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port 2 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the high probability variation frequency update process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 display process transition setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process transition setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process transition setting process. FIG. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during small hitting fanfare. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during small hitting fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a middle hit process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port 1 signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol determination frequency signal edit process. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the pattern of a control method. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of an effect when one change display is completed from simultaneous change. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of an effect when one change display is completed from simultaneous change. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of an effect when one change display is completed from simultaneous change. It is a figure explaining the display at the time of a power failure recovery. It is a figure explaining the display at the time of a power failure recovery. It is a figure explaining the display at the time of a power failure recovery. It is a flowchart explaining the main process in an effect control apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a single-shot command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a change interruption setting process. It is a flow chart explaining change resumption setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart explaining a variable system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a change production setting process. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of an effect when one change display is completed from the simultaneous change in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of an effect when one change display is completed from the simultaneous change in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the continuous notice when interruption in the 1st modification occurs. It is a flowchart explaining the change interruption setting process in a 1st modification. It is a flow chart explaining change resumption setting processing in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the prefetch symbol type | system | group command process in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the prefetch fluctuation system command processing in a 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the prefetch lottery process in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the kind of variation pattern in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the continuous notice when interruption in the 2nd modification occurs. It is a flowchart explaining the variable system command process in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the structure of the collective display apparatus in a 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the special figure indicator at the time of being interrupted in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the pattern of the control method in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the production when the interruption in the 5th modification occurs.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to provide decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. In addition, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Further, to the right of the production button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button that is operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, a still image or a moving image can be displayed as an effect image. For example, a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the left and right portions of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces an effect of a game by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

  In the game area 32, three general winning ports 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning port 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 12).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game. A game ball won in the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 12). Further, a second start winning port 37 (start winning port, start winning region) for providing a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game is provided at the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32. A game ball won in the second start winning opening 37 is detected by the start opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 12).

  Below the center case 40 in the game area 32, on the right side of the first start winning opening 36, a first special that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A variable winning device (upper prize winning port) 38 is provided.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is converted from the closed state (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable prize winning device 38 includes, for example, an upper prize winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c that is driven by an upper prize winning solenoid 38b (see FIG. 12) as a driving device. In the special gaming state based on the above, the upper prize winning opening is converted from the closed state to the opened state, thereby facilitating the inflow of gaming balls into the upper winning prize opening and allowing the player to obtain a predetermined game value (the prize ball). ).

  An upper prize port switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 12) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper prize port is disposed inside the upper prize port (winning area). Yes. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two upper prize winning port switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the upper prize winning port is detected by any one of the upper prize winning port switches 38a. As described above, by providing a plurality of upper prize winning port switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball flowing into the upper prize winning opening.

  Directly below the first start winning port 36, a second special variable winning device (lower large winning port) 39 that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. Has been. The second special variation winning device 39 includes an opening / closing door 39c that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side.

  The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is converted from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 includes, for example, a lower big prize opening opened and closed by an open / close door 39c driven by a lower big prize solenoid 39b (see FIG. 12) as a driving device. In the special gaming state based on the above, the lower prize winning opening is converted from the closed state to the opened state, thereby facilitating the inflow of gaming balls into the lower major winning prize opening, and allowing the player to obtain a predetermined game value (the prize ball). ).

  A lower large prize opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 12) is provided inside the lower big prize opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big prize opening. . Also, below the second special variable winning device 39, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  The arrangement of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is not limited to this. For example, the second special variable winning device 39 may be provided adjacent to the upper side or the lower side of the first special variable winning device 38 in FIG. In this case, it may be completely overlapped vertically, or it may be shifted to the left and right and only a part may overlap vertically. Further, the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c are not limited to the attacker type, and other types such as a slide type that can open the grand prize opening by sliding a plate-like member capable of closing the big prize opening. It may be in the form of

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player can aim to win the first start winning opening 36 by firing the game ball to the left game area by adjusting the firing force (so-called left-handed), and launch the game ball to the right game area By so-called “right-handed”, it is possible to aim for winning in the second start winning opening 37 and the first special variable winning device 38. It should be noted that the second special variation winning device 39 can be aimed regardless of whether the game ball is fired in the left or right game area.

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game, and a batch of various information are displayed. A display device 50 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display for a special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure fluctuation display section) composed of a 7 segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. 51 (D1) and special figure 2 display for special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure fluctuation display part) 52 (D2) and start memory number notification of special figure 1 variable display game composed of LED lamp Storage display unit 54 (D11 to D14).

  Further, the collective display device 50 has a round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of opening / closing of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39), and left-handed ( The first game state display unit 77 (D8 to D10) for notifying the player of the right hit (the normal hit) and the right hit (how to hit the game state) that are advantageous to the player, and the probability state (high) of the special figure variation display game A probability display section 78 (D15 to D18) for notifying a probability state or a low probability state) is provided. The collective display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. A unit (display) or the like may be provided. Further, the ordinary variation display game is executed as in a conventional gaming machine, and a normal starting point that constitutes a second start winning opening through which the game ball can be awarded based on the specific result of the ordinary variation display game When equipped with a variable winning device, a general map display for displaying a general variable display game, a memory display for notifying the start memory number of a general variable display game, and a lighted time when a short time occurs A short time state notifying unit or the like may be provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 3B, it is provided on the lower right side of 7 segments in addition to the central segment. In addition, the eighth segment is also blinked to indicate that it is changing, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. When the result of the game is “out of”, as a result mode of out of game, for example, the central segment (in the case of Special Figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on, and the result of the game is In the case of “winning”, the game results are displayed with the result modes (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the off-result mode being turned on as the winning result mode (special result mode).

  The memory display unit 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = reserved number) among the number of winning balls to the first starting winning port 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. ), A plurality of LEDs are turned off and turned on (flashing). The round display unit 60 is composed of LED lamps, etc., and as shown in FIG. 3D, when not in the special gaming state, all LEDs are turned off, and during the special gaming state, it is selected according to the special result. The LED is turned on corresponding to the number of rounds. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 3 (e), the first gaming state display unit 77 turns off all the LEDs when the gaming state is more advantageous to the player by left-handed than by right-handed (normally hitting). When the game state is more advantageous to the player than right-handed (left-handed), all LEDs are turned on. As shown in FIG. 3E, the probability display unit 78 turns off all the LEDs when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), and the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability change). In the case of (state), all the LEDs are turned on.

  FIG. 4 shows a display mode in the special figure 1 display 51. During the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the center segment and the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment are blinked at a cycle of 100 milliseconds. And a result is displayed by lighting in the aspect corresponding to a result with completion | finish of fluctuation | variation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, any one lighting mode is selected from among these by a random number or the like.

  5 and 6 show the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52. FIG. Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Display During the fluctuation display of the game, the center segment blinks at a cycle of 100 milliseconds. And a result is displayed by lighting in the aspect corresponding to a result with completion | finish of fluctuation | variation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, any one lighting mode is selected from among these by a random number or the like. Multiple patterns of lighting are set for each of the big hits and small hits, which will be described later, but this does not clearly notify the player of which big hits have occurred, especially when a small hit occurs. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally trying to acquire a game ball at the time of a small hit by looking at the lighting mode of the special figure 2 display 52.

  FIG. 7 shows the probability of jackpot and jackpot, the probability of jackpot type when winning the jackpot, and the sort probability of jackpot type when winning the jackpot. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state is generated and a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is set (the consecutive accessory operating device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

  The jackpot probability, which is the probability of being a big hit (first special result), is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the probabilities in the normal gaming state which is the low probability state and the specific gaming state which is the high probability state are respectively illustrated. The probability is as shown in 7 (a). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, after the special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on the big hit, it becomes a high probability state, and when a special number variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times), the low probability state is achieved. It is comprised so that it may become. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 7B. This small hit probability is higher in special figure 2 than in special figure 1. The small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the lottery for the big hit and the small hit, the big hit and the small hit do not overlap. Therefore, in the high probability state, either the big hit or the small hit is surely won for Special Figure 2. In addition, you may make it become a loss result.

  FIG. 7 (c) shows the types of jackpots that can be selected in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the special variable winning devices and distribution probabilities that are released for each jackpot type, and FIG. 1 and 2 show the types of small hits that can be selected, the special variable winning device that is opened for each type of small hit, the opening time, the number of times of opening, and the distribution probability. It should be noted that the 2R probability variation D1 in the special figure 2 can hardly be expected, but since it is a big hit, the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high probability state is set to 50 again. In the special game state based on the 2R probability variation D1, an effect is provided such that the number of games that can be executed in a high probability state is added.

  FIG. 8 and FIG. 9 show the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern when the result is out of order in a low probability state. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for winning in the first start winning opening 36 by left-handed and aim for winning in the second starting winning opening 37 by right-handing. It has become. That is, it is possible to select which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly executed according to the player's intention. In addition, depending on the gaming state, the game is designed assuming that the game progresses mainly in one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. According to this design, the player plays the game. In order to progress, it is configured such that it is advantageous for a player to play a game mainly in one of the special figure variation display games determined to be main in design. In the following description, one special figure fluctuation display game determined to be main in each gaming state may be referred to as main fluctuation, and the other special figure fluctuation display game may be referred to as irregular fluctuation.

  In the low probability state, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is designed as a main fluctuation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is designated as an irregular fluctuation. In order to allow the player to proceed with the game in accordance with this design, for Special Figure 2, regardless of which variation pattern is selected, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal gaming state, the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a higher probability of small hits than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The execution of the variable display game in FIG. 2 is made inefficient in terms of time, and in the low probability state, the game is progressed mainly in the special FIG. 1 variable display game.

  FIG. 8B shows a variation pattern when the result is out of order in a high probability state. In the high probability state, the variation pattern is not set because the lottery result for the special figure 2 variation display game is not likely to be off. For the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, only one fluctuation pattern is selected. In this high probability state, contrary to the low probability state described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set as the main fluctuation, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set as the irregular fluctuation.

  Here, the fluctuation time in the case of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game that is irregular fluctuation in a high probability state is a deviation result in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is irregular fluctuation in a low probability state. Is set shorter than the fluctuation time (see FIG. 8A). As will be described later, a short time is set as a fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit in the high probability state, and in the high probability state, a lottery is drawn for the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is no case in which the result of.

  In other words, in the high probability state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and can be executed efficiently in terms of time, the special figure 1 variable display game having the result of losing the lottery result is clearly disadvantageous. The game can be progressed mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game to the player without setting a long variable time. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game may not be set longer than necessary.

  FIG. 9A shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in a low probability state. For the special figure 2, only the variation pattern that does not generate the reach state can be selected. In the low probability state, the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit may be longer than the fluctuation time that can be selected when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit. FIG. 9B shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in a high probability state. In either case, a reach state is not generated, and a very short variation time variation pattern is selected.

  In particular, for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the second shortest fluctuation time is selected when compared with the fluctuation time that can be selected when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit. ing. Thereby, even if it is a high probability state, the possibility that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which becomes irregular fluctuation will stop before the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which becomes main fluctuation is raised. Although the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in FIG. 2 is performed according to the type of jackpot described above, it may be determined by a random number or the like.

  FIG. 9C shows a variation pattern when the result is a small hit in a low probability state. As for the special figure 2, a long fluctuation in which a fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected without generating a reach state. FIG. 9D shows a fluctuation pattern when the result is a small hit in a high probability state. In either case, a reach state is not generated, and a very short variation time variation pattern is selected.

  FIG. 10 and FIG. 11 show special in special game state (first special game state) based on big hit (first special result) and special game state (second special game state) based on small hit (second special result). The open / close pattern of the variable winning device is shown. FIG. 10 shows the opening / closing pattern of the special variable winning device for the big win type and the small hit type that can be selected in the special figure 1 variable display game, and FIG. 11 shows the big hit type and the small type that can be selected in the special figure 2 variable display game. The open / close pattern of the special variable prize-winning device in the hit type is shown.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, when the big hit type is a big hit of 16R probability variation A1, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened according to the big prize opening / closing pattern 1 on the special figure 1. . In the special prize 1 upper winning opening / closing pattern 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, an opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). Thereafter, a round in which an interval period of 2000 ms and an open period of 29000 ms are set is repeated up to 16 rounds, and after the ending period of 11000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  In addition, the time described in the interval period and the ending period in each open / close pattern shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 is a time obtained by adding the remaining sphere processing time and the interval time or ending time. For example, the interval period in the special winning opening / closing pattern 1 in FIG. 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 600 ms in the second half is the interval time. Further, the ending period in the special prize opening / closing pattern 1 in FIG. 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 9600 ms in the second half is the ending time.

  The other open / close patterns are a fanfare period, an open period, an interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and an ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure, and the first special variable winning device is accordingly constructed. 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Note that the special prize opening / closing pattern 5 on the special figure 2 in FIG. 11 is configured by opening the 27200 ms in 5R, repeating the 200 ms opening and the 1500 ms closing 11 times, and then opening the 25000 ms. Also, in any open / close pattern, when a predetermined number of winnings are made in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that time.

  In addition, for example, when the opening / closing pattern is the same from the start of the special game state to the middle, as shown in the special figure 1 top prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 and the special figure 2 top prize opening opening / closing patterns 2 and 3, The effects in the device 41 may be the same so that it is difficult to determine the big hit type or the small hit type. Further, during the special gaming state, information suggestion or notification that enables discrimination of the big hit type or the small hit type may be performed.

  In addition, when a big hit is executed by any of the special winning opening opening / closing patterns 4 and 5 on the special figure 2, the effect of whether or not the long open round is executed again after the end of 4R (whether or not to continue) is provided. You may make it perform. In this case, for example, if the special winning opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 is opened, the short opening is performed from 5R to 16R which is the final round, and the big hit is completed. In FIG. 2, after the short opening which is substantially the same as 5R to 16R of the special prize opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 described above is performed, the long opening (25000 ms) is performed, and thereafter, the same long opening as the 4R is resumed. . Therefore, if the special winning opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 is used, the time from 5R to 15R is used, and if the special winning opening / closing pattern 5 on the special figure 2 is used, the time between the multiple short openings of 5R is used. If the special winning opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 is continued, the result that the long opening is not resumed (the big hit game does not continue) is notified. By notifying the result that the long release is resumed (the big hit game is continued), the player may be given a sense of expectation.

  From the above, the special results include the first special result (big hit) that can generate the first special game state and the second special game that has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. The second special result (small hit) that can generate the state is included.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game. Further, when the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Further, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). In addition, when the first special gaming state that is a special gaming state based on the big hit and the second special gaming state that is a special gaming state based on the small hit are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special gaming state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35, the first start winning opening 36, wins the second start winning port 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32 Is done. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the type of the winning winning port is set. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 12) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

  A winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special FIG. 1 variable display game by a start opening 1 switch 36a provided therein, and a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) Is stored in the limit. When the game ball wins the first start winning slot 36 in a state where the special figure 1 variable display game can be started and the first start memory number is 0, the first start memory is generated with the start right. Is stored, the first start memory number is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is immediately started based on the first start memory. At this time, the first start memory number is decremented by 1. . On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended or is in a special gaming state In addition, when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 36, if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first start memory number is incremented by 1 and one first start memory is stored. . When the first start memory number becomes 1 or more, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (the previous special figure 1 variable display game ends or the special game state ends). The start memory number is decremented by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

  A winning ball to the second starting winning port 37 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by a start port 2 switch 37a provided inside. In the state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, when a winning is made to the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state has been entered. Even if a game ball wins the second start winning opening 37, the second start memory is not generated. In the state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, if there is a winning at the second starting winning opening 37, the second starting memory is generated once for convenience of processing. Since it is immediately digested, the second start memory for deferring the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur.

  Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 12). Is stored as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times for the first start memory). The number stored in the special figure start memory is displayed on the start display number storage display unit 54 (special figure 1 hold indicator) of the collective display device 50 and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. It is displayed as a decoration start memory display.

  The game control device 100 plays the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first fluctuation display device) based on the winning to the first start winning opening 36 or the first start memory, and the second start. Based on the winning in the winning opening 37, the special figure 2 display game is performed by the special figure 2 display 52 (second fluctuation display device). The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time. While one of the special figure fluctuation display games is being executed, the other special figure fluctuation display game has a special result (big hit or small hit). If it becomes, the one special figure variation display game is ended as a result other than the special result (out-of-order result).

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after the variable display is performed in the display manner as shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the predetermined result manner is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (a big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special gaming state (so-called big hit state). In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, a special result form (small hit result form) in which the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result. It becomes a small hit and becomes the second special gaming state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 serves as a first fluctuation display means capable of displaying a first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) based on winning of a game ball in the first start winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second fluctuation display means capable of displaying a second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37.

  In response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner on the display device (image display device) 41. The special figure variation display game to be executed is executed. The decorative special figure fluctuation display game includes a decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and a decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Displayed in the display area. Then, a variation display is performed in accordance with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and a display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special diagram variation display game.

  That is, the display device 41 displays a decoration variation display game in which the decoration identification information is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the first variation display game (Special Figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (Special Figure 2 variation display game) ( A decoration variation display means capable of displaying a decoration special map variation display game) is provided. The decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponds to the special figure fluctuation display game, and the display device 41 also includes a first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation) based on the winning of a game ball in the first start winning opening 36. 2nd fluctuation which can display the 2nd fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) based on winning of the game ball to the 2nd start winning opening 37 It can be said that it forms a display means. It should be noted that separate display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of small hits, but in the normal game state that is in a low probability state, the fluctuation time is as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. A very long (about 10 minutes) long variation is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time in the normal gaming state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at winning a small hit in the normal gaming state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player to make a left turn and aim at the first start winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game. Although the long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

  When the big hit occurs and the special gaming state is reached, the first special variable winning device 38 can be aimed by right-handed. In addition, when the 2nd special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus 39 is open | released in the special game state based on a big hit or a small hit, it can aim at right-handed or left-handed. After the special gaming state based on the big hit, the specific gaming state is a high probability state. In this specific gaming state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short, so it is advantageous for the player to perform the special figure 2 variable display game by making a right turn and aiming at the second start winning opening 37. It becomes. In the specific gaming state, the special variable winning device based on the small hits and the special variable winning device based on the big hits occur frequently, and the player can acquire a large amount of game balls.

FIG. 12 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. In other words, the game control device 100 can store and retain information regarding games even if a power failure occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and can resume a game based on the stored information after the power failure is restored. And a game information storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. And, for example, a state in which a variable display by a plurality of variable display areas is maintained (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result forms are aligned. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, Based on the number of starting memories, etc., any one variation pattern table is selected from a plurality of variation pattern tables and acquired. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36a in the first start prize port 36, and a start port 2 in the second start prize port 37. A plurality of (1 to x, two in this embodiment) upper prize port switches 38a and second special variable prize device 39 disposed in the switch 37a, the prize port switch 35a, and the first special variable prize device 38. An interface chip that is connected to the lower major prize opening switch 39a and receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches, and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Proximity I / F) 121 is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper large winning port switch 38a, and the lower large winning port switch 39a are the second input port 123. Is input. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. In addition, the third input port 124 has a detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs from the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, each data of the input unit 120 is reset. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open / close data of an upper large prize opening solenoid 38b for opening the first special variable winning prize apparatus 38 and a lower large prize opening solenoid 39b for opening the second special variable winning prize apparatus 39. Is output. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line connected to the anode terminal of the LED according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the upper large prize opening solenoid 38b and the lower large prize opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal (driving). Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current draw side of 50, and a third driver 138c that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 Four drivers 138d are provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and thus ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, the upper prize port switch The non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as proximity) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal comes close to the coil. Called switch). In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, and the like in a form output from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In these control circuits, on the basis of the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the first start winning port 36, the random number for jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is extracted. The first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The random number value for determining the big hit in the first start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit or variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the second start winning port 37, the random number for determining the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted to the second RAM 111C. Store the starting memory. The random number value for determining the big hit in the second start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit or variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed. The second start memory can be generated only in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, and temporarily stores information necessary for starting the special figure 2 variable display game. The special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on winning in the start winning area (first start winning opening 36, second start winning opening 37) of the game balls flowing down the game area 32. Make a means.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, and also displays the special game. Performs processing to generate a state. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A, for example, can open the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the top big prize opening solenoid 38b and allow the game ball to flow into the top big prize opening. Control. Alternatively, the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened by the lower big prize winning solenoid 39b, and control is performed so that the game ball can flow into the lower big prize winning opening.

  Then, the special winning opening is opened until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins the special winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. Opening is defined as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the low probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 18 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 14, first, a stack pointer which is a start address of an area in which a value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs after a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step X1) is performed. A stack pointer setting process (step X2) is set. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and a process for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step X8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (Step X9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits for the power to the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc., by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step X12). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, when the standby time has ended, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step X14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step X16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17). If so (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N) If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X25 in FIG. 15 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step X21 of FIG. 15, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

  Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted (step X22). The interruption of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game means that when both of the special figure fluctuation display games are executed as described later, a specific special result is derived on the one hand. The special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted and the special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted in the resumption control in which the special game state is resumed after the special game state ends. If it is suspended, the special figure 1 game interruption flag or special figure 2 game interruption flag is set according to the suspended special figure change display game, and these flags stop the power supply to the gaming machine. The memory is held even while you are.

  When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not interrupted (step X22; N), the process proceeds to step X24. When the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended (step X22; Y), a suspended command corresponding to the suspended special figure is set (step X23).

  After that, a command at the time of power failure restoration corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X24). Proceed to X30. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X24, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command, and an interrupted command are transmitted. As for the screen designation command, if both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are in normal processing, which will be described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is neither being executed nor being in a special game state, the customer is waiting. Send a waiting demo screen command, otherwise send a recovery screen command. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X25, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step X25), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X26), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step X27). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X28). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Then, the RAM initialization command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X29), and the process proceeds to step X30. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X29, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (display a customer waiting demonstration screen and light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). And a plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  In step X30, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step X30, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step X31). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the special figure) An initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) is saved in a predetermined area of RWM (step X32), and interrupt is permitted (step X33). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X34) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are timer interrupt processing that is a processing unit of the program. It is a “low speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle. The big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number employ a so-called “initial value changing method” in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step X34, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step X35). It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X36). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X36; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step X34). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X34) (step X33), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process in step X34 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X36; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step X35 (step X37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step X37; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X36). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X37; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step X38), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step X39) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step X40), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step X41). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X42) for calculating the checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X43), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X44) ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off.

  As described above, the information stored in the RAM 111C can be stored even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area. At the same time, by calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to determine whether the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power is shut off when the power is turned on again. That is, the game control device 100 backs up information related to the game when a power failure occurs, and also serves as a backup means for restarting the game after recovery from the power failure based on the backed up information.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 16 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19 and X42) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step X53). . The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step X54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step X57). If the calculation has not been completed (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 17 shows the initial value random number update process (step X34) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is the special figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 18 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). At Step X102, the same processing as Step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step X103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, output processing (step X104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper large winning opening solenoid 38b, lower large winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed based on output data set in various processes. In addition, when the signal for stopping the firing is output in step X5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step X105), a random number update process 1 (step X106), and a random number update process 2 (step X107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper large winning port switch 38a, and the lower large winning port switch 39a, and error monitoring. A prize opening switch / state monitoring process (step X108) for performing (such as whether the front frame or the glass frame is open) is performed.

  Next, a start port switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 37. And the special figure 1 game process (step X110) which performs the process regarding a special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the special figure 2 game process (step X111) which performs the process regarding a special figure 2 fluctuation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display games and various information related to the game to display desired contents, and a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) that performs processing to check whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the board, and board fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality A monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, external information editing processing (step X115) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step X103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the input process, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (step X122), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S122). X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X126), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and a switch reading process (step X128) is performed.

Thereafter, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X131), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), switch reading processing (step X133) is performed, and the input processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.
In addition, as information about the unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted, information prepared for each input port is used.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps X128 and X133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step X141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step X144). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step X145).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step X146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area (Save) (step X149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 in the first and second readings, and a different bit is 0 (step X150), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 is calculated. The confirmation bit is set (step X151).

  Next, an unconfirmed bit pattern is created in which the same bit in the first and second reads is set to 0, and a different bit is set to 1 (step X152). The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step X153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step X154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step X155), The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process at a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step X104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 12) for outputting the segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (step X162).

  Then, the digit counter value for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the digit counter value is acquired (step S163). X164), the acquired information and the external information data are synthesized (step X165). Then, the combined data is output to the digit output port 136 and the external information output port 137 (step X166). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (step X167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (step X168).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and combined (step X169), the combined data and the output data for launch permission are combined (step X170), and the combined data is output for external information output. Output to the port 137 (step X171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step X172). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X174). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step X175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X176) and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area for each of the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Accordingly, 1 is added to the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area based on the winning at the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step X183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step X183; N), the process returns to step X181 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step X181 that there is a count number (step X181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X184), and the target winning number counter is counted. The number of payouts corresponding to the area is acquired (step X185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added to obtain a new prize ball remaining number (step X186), and the result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step X187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result, which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal (step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). When the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, the result of the subtraction is not saved in the prize ball remaining area, so the value before the subtraction is stored in the prize ball remaining area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step X190), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step X191). Return to Step X188.

  As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

  In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether or not the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal. Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal flag area in the process at power-on. This indeterminate state means that an idle state or a busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  If the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. In this case, it is determined that the busy state is also in an indefinite state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  If the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

  If there is no count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and all the winning number counter areas are updated. It is determined whether the count number has been checked (step X197). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step X197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step X195 that there is a count number in the winning counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning counter area is updated by -1 (step X198), a payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the winning areas provided in the gaming area 32 (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the general winning port 35, the first special variable winning device 38). , A game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the second special variable prize winning device 39), and a game based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) that performs payout control of the ball, and the game control means outputs a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. Based on (busy signal), a control is performed to transmit a prize ball command to the payout control means. When a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, a status signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means Is output In response to the fact that the prize signal is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the state signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control is continuously output for a predetermined period. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game area 32 has different winning areas (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39). A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) is provided for each prize ball number, and a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls is transmitted. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200). Before the identification of whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. I will do it.

  In addition to performing overall game control, a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39). ) A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to the game ball, and a payout control for performing game ball payout control based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. Means (payout control device 200), and the game control means can start the payout control with a status signal output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means, and the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is won in a predetermined prize area. Prize ball containing information about And an external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the number (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, and the external information output means is configured so that the status signal output from the payout control means is a payout control means. The award ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second start winning port 37, general winning port 35). The first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39) generate a prize ball command as a unit, and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) is configured to transmit the prize ball command to the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200). Is memorable Updates are made when a game ball is won in a predetermined winning area, and the number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating the game ball in response to the transmission of a prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, By updating in accordance with the accumulation process of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 23 shows the random number update process 1 (step X106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

  When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224). When the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number is handled. Set to a register (start value setting register) that holds a start value of a random number counter (random number area) to be executed (step X223). Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X225), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X226), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 24 shows the random number update process 2 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step X233). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment is loaded (step X234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). When the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as the addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) The mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the masked value is set, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step X237), and the process proceeds to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step X238), and proceeds to step X239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240). The process proceeds to step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) as the lower 1 byte of the random value. ) Is set (step X241), and the process proceeds to step X242.

  In step X242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether this new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step X233 (step X243). If the new random value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step X244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number update processing 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), a new random number value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step X247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111A, among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the starting area of the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 37, changes the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 25 shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one upper large winning opening switch 38a in the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step X301). The illegal & winning monitoring process (step X302) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  The winning mouth monitoring table (illegal monitoring table) includes a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the illegal winning number area, and an illegal winning error. Information of a notification command, an illegal winning number upper limit (number of fraud occurrence determination), an address of a winning mouth switch table, and notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. The winning opening switch table defines information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), monitoring switch bits, the winning counter area 1 address, and the winning counter area 2 address. These fraud monitoring tables and winning tables are prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower large winning opening switch 39a in the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is prepared (step X303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning. A fraud & winning monitoring process (step X304) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Next, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for a winning opening switch (in this case, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) (Step X305). The winning number counter updating process (step X306) is performed. Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process for monitoring the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state scheduled to be executed mainly by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step X307).

  Next, the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step X308). This state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X309). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X310) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like can be performed. When the value of the state scan counter is set to 1, monitoring of the state based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

  Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X311). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X312) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on a signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, and state scanning is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, the state monitoring based on the frame radio wave improper signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (step X313). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X313; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X313; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X314), and a gaming machine state check for judging a state such as an error has occurred. Processing (step X315) is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch or the like can be performed. Is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step X316) for setting a busy signal flag based on a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. To do. Note that the processing from step X314 to X316 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 ms, the processing from step X314 to X316 is performed every 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 26 shows the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps X302 and X304) in the above-described prize opening switch / status monitoring process. This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process that is performed on each of the two upper big prize opening switches 38a of the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the lower big prize opening switch 39a of the second special variable prize winning device 39. As for the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39), since it is easy to be fraudulently forcibly opening the door and inserting the game ball and paying out the prize ball, the fraud is monitored in addition to the detection of the prize. .

  In this fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step X321) to determine whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the error monitoring target winning port switch is the upper large winning port switch 38a. When the switch is the lower large prize opening switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize-winning switch (step X323). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not (5) has been exceeded (step X325).

  The number of judgments is set to five. For example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is valid for the large winning opening switch This is to prevent the player from judging that the player has won a prize or the noise has been added to the signal, and not to judge it as an error easily.

  If the determined number is not exceeded (step X325; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). When the number of determinations is exceeded (step X325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step X326), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area (step 6326). X327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step X328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330), and a winning number counter updating process (step X331) for setting a winning ball is performed. . Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step X333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is permitted to be updated (step X333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the error monitoring target prize opening switch is one of the upper prize winning opening switches 38a, and is permitted when the error monitoring target prize opening switch is the other upper prize winning opening switch 38a. Not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the first special variation winning device 38 and time-up in half of a specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . Note that when the prize port switch subject to error monitoring is the lower large prize port switch 39a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335). If the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step X336), and an illegal win cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step X337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize monitoring process, the number of illegal winnings of interest is cleared ( In step X339, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step X340). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step X340).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (step X340; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step X341), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step X342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 27 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps X306 and X331) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port switch table of the winning port monitoring table (step X351), and input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, the change in input). ) Is determined (step X352).

  If there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step X362). If there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs (step X354). Step X355). If no overflow has occurred (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357). ). When an overflow occurs (step X355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step X359). If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361). ), It is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step X362). If an overflow has occurred (step X359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X362).

  When the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step X362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X352). If all the switches have been monitored (step X362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting processing]
FIG. 28 shows the effect command setting process (step X342) in the above-described fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371), and it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the production serial transmission buffer (step X373), and the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374). Then, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X375; Y), the process returns to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X376), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

  Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special Figure 2 Abnormal Variation Monitoring Processing]
FIG. 29 shows the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (step X307) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state which is in the low probability state, but the player who does not know this. Alternatively, it is conceivable that a player who intentionally aims to execute the special figure 2 variable display game makes a right strike. In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, a process for informing such a player to make a left strike is performed.

  The abnormal fluctuation here means irregular fluctuation, which is a non-main special figure fluctuation display game. Even in the normal gaming state, it is possible to win the second start winning opening 37, so even if it is irregular fluctuation, it is a legitimate special figure fluctuation display game, using a game ball or magnet with a thread, radio wave This is different from an illegal act in which a special figure variation display game is executed by illegally detecting a winning by, for example, launching a game. However, it is not preferable that the special figure fluctuation display game is continuously executed in the special figure fluctuation display game determined to be the main in the design of the gaming machine. Here, such irregular fluctuation is detected. The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is counted, and when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches a specified value, a corresponding process is performed. Of course, even when a special display 2 variation display game in which irregular winning is detected by illegally detecting a winning at the second start winning opening 37 by using a game ball or magnet with a thread, or by emitting radio waves, etc. is also executed. 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations is counted. That is, regardless of whether or not it is a fraudulent act, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is irregular fluctuation is executed, the number of abnormal fluctuations in the special figure 2 is counted.

  In this special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, it is first determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381). The special figure 1 check flag is a flag that is set when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. If there is no special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381; N), it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387). If there is a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381; Y), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X382), and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (step X383).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 18) (step X384), and if smaller than the prescribed value (step X384; Y), it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag. Determination is made (step X387). In addition, when it is larger than the specified value (step X384; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number added when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability state) must be zero. For example, -1 is updated (step X385), the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X386), and it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387). The minimum value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to zero.

  The special figure 2 check flag is a flag that is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. In determining whether there is the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387), if there is no special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387; N), the process proceeds to step X390. If there is a special figure 2 check flag (step X387; Y), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X388), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by 1 (step X389). 2. It is determined whether the number of abnormal fluctuations is smaller than a specified value (for example, 5) (step X390).

  That is, the special figure 2 check flag is set based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game which is a non-main variable display game (irregular fluctuation) in a low probability state. Based on this, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number forming the abnormality determination number is updated (added here) in the abnormality occurrence direction. Also, the special figure 1 fluctuation number that makes up the number of abnormality cancellations based on the start of the main fluctuation display game (main fluctuation) is updated (added here), and the abnormality determination number based on the fact that the number of abnormality cancellations satisfies a predetermined condition The number of abnormal fluctuations in Fig. 2 is updated (subtracted here) in the direction of canceling the abnormality. Therefore, the game control device 100 serves as an abnormality determination number management means for updating the abnormality determination number in the direction of occurrence of abnormality based on the start of the non-main variable display game.

  When the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is not smaller than the prescribed value (step X390; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to the prescribed value -1 (step X391), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is set to the initial value ( For example, 60000 ms) is set (step X392). Next, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is prepared (step X393), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is prepared (step X394), and the process proceeds to step X399. In this case, the player makes a right-hand hit and the player makes a right-hand hit even though it is a normal game state (low probability state) in which it is recommended to advance the game mainly by the special figure 1 variable display game. FIG. 2 shows a case where a variable display game is being executed, and a process for notifying the player to make a left strike is performed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is updated by -1 (step X395), and it is determined whether the time is up (step X396). ). If the time is not up (step X396; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. When the time is up (step X396; Y), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag is prepared (step X397), and a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is prepared (step X398).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prepared flag is the same as the current special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation flag area value (step X399). If the prepared flag and the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area value are the same (step X399; Y), that is, if there is no state change, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared flag and the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area value are not the same (step X399; N), that is, if there is a change in state, the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag. (Step X400).

  If the prepared flag is not the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag (step X400; N), that is, if it is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step X402), the effect command setting process is performed, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag (step X400; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X401), and then the processing of steps X402 and X403 is performed. (Step X403), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control apparatus 300 along with the detection of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is issued along with the cancellation of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation. 300, the start and end of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification will be set.

  FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 show an example of the processing by the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process accompanying the progress of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is 3 and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is 15 in the normal gaming state. When the next special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started from this state (t11), the special figure 1 fluctuation number changes from 15 to 16. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t12), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number changes from 3 to 4.

  Thereafter, each time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by one (t13, t14). Here, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches the specified value 18 (t14), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by -1 to change from 4 to 3, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0. The Similarly, every time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (t15 to t17), and when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches a predetermined value 18 (t17), The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by -1 to change from 3 to 2, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to zero. That is, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is subtracted every time a specified number (18 times here) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed.

  FIG. 31 shows a case where special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed. In this example, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is 3 in the normal gaming state. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started from this state (t21), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated from 3 to 4. Further, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t22), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches a predetermined value of 5.

  Thereby, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved, and based on this flag, the output of external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred and the gaming machine error status signal to the device outside the gaming machine is started, The occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation can be grasped by the management device of the amusement store or the like. Also, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 notifies that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred by display or voice. That is, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 serve as a response means for performing a predetermined response based on the fact that the abnormality determination number (the number of abnormal fluctuations in Fig. 2) satisfies a predetermined condition (becomes a specified value).

  Further, when the number of abnormal fluctuations in the special figure 2 reaches a predetermined value of 5, the time measurement by the abnormal fluctuation notification timer in the special figure 2 is started (t22), and a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses ( t23), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the gaming machine error state signal is stopped. Further, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is transmitted to the production control apparatus 300, and the production control apparatus 300 ends the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the reception of this command.

  The number of abnormal fluctuations in special figure 2 reaches a specified value (here, 5) and is determined to be a predetermined value -1 (here, 4) after it is determined that the abnormal fluctuation in special figure 2 has occurred. Therefore, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is newly started before the lapse of the predetermined time, the special figure 2 fluctuation number becomes the specified value, and the measurement of the predetermined time is newly started from that point. As a result, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed despite the fact that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred, the notice period is extended accordingly.

  Thus, by determining that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaching a specified value (for example, 5), for example, a game ball enters the game area on the right side unintentionally. Thus, when the second start winning opening 37 is won, it is possible to prevent immediately from determining that there is an abnormal fluctuation in the special figure 2. Furthermore, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation which occurred about the winning to the 2nd start winning opening 37 which is not intended because the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the predetermined number of times was made to be subtracted. The number is canceled if a game is subsequently played, and it is possible to prevent a mere mistake or a result of another player's game from accumulating and determining that there is a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation.

  Note that the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number for which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed and the special value of the special figure 1 fluctuation number for performing the process of subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number are arbitrary. It can be set. Each specified value set here may be any value as long as it can prevent the player from aiming to start the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state. Also, when a power failure occurs and is restored, monitoring is resumed from the state before the power failure occurred. Even if special figure 2 abnormal change notification is performed, the payout of the winning ball for winning is performed as usual.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 32 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps X310, X312 and X315) in the above-described prize opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step X451), and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

  Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table. This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, and the signal ON judgment data, status off command (in case of error system, error notification end command), status on command (in case of error system, error notification start command), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer A comparison value is included.

  If the target signal is not on (step X452: N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step X453), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step X454). Thereafter, a target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X455), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). The case where the target signal is not on (step X452: N) is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (normal), and that the signal from the touch switch indicates that the signal is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, if the target signal is on (step X452: Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step X456), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step X457). Thereafter, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step X459). When the target signal is on (step X452: Y), this is a state indicating that an error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is the state which shows.

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step X459; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step X459; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step X460). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step X463).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of comparison value -1 (step X464). The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step X465).

  When the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step X465; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X467), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. Thereby, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 33 shows the payout busy signal check process (step X316) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X473). When the payout busy signal is on (step X471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X474), and an on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X475). .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal state region is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, whether or not there has been a change of on and off (step X476), and if they are the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). If they are not the same (step X476; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step X477), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X478), and the busy signal monitoring timer is set. +1 is updated (step X479).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the previously set ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value, that is, the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step) X480).
If the signal determination time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check process is terminated. When the signal determination time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by −1, and the previously set ON determination monitoring timer comparison value or OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value is −1. (Step X481), the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (Step X482), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  By this processing, a busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step X109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a start port 1 (first start winning port 36) winning monitor table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information on a start opening winning set that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on winning in the first start winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X493).

  When the information on the presence of the start opening prize is not set based on the winning at the first start winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, no start opening information is set. On the other hand, if the information on the start opening winning is set based on the winning at the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the low probability is in effect (step X494). And when it is in low probability (step X494; Y), it transfers to step X497. If the probability is not low (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X496). After that, a table for setting information on hold by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497), and special figure start port 1 switch processing is performed (step X498).

  In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the right-handed instruction notification for instructing the player to make a right-handed strike is performed by display, voice, or the like. When the player is in the high probability state, the right-handed player is more advantageous for the player. Right-handed instruction notification is performed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 2 (second starting winning port 37) (step X499), hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X500), and the big hit random number is calculated based on the winning to the second starting winning port 37. It is determined whether or not there is information on a start opening winning set that is set when acquired (step X501).

  If the information on the presence of the start opening prize is not set based on the winning at the second start winning opening 37 (step X501; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, no start opening information is set. On the other hand, when the start opening prize presence information is set based on the winning to the second start winning opening 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether the probability is high (step X502). And when it is in high probability (step X502; Y), it transfers to step X507. If the probability is not high (step X502; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is being hit, that is, the first special gaming state that is a special gaming state based on the jackpot (step X503).

  If it is a big hit (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If it is not a big hit (step X503; N), it is determined whether a high probability final fluctuation is being performed (step X504). High probability final variation means that the special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) since the end of the first special gaming state. The last special figure change display game that has been executed is being executed.

  When this high probability final change is being performed (step X504; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If the high probability final change is not being performed (step X504; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X506). After that, a table for setting information on hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X507), special chart start port 2 switch processing is performed (step X508), and the start port switch monitoring processing is terminated.

  In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the left-handed instruction notification command, the left-handed instruction notification for instructing the player to left-hand is displayed by display or voice. When the player is in the low probability state, the left-handed player is more advantageous for the player. A left-handed instruction notification is performed.

  In the first special game state, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened except for some types of jackpots, so that the left-handed instruction notification is not performed even in the low probability state. In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display game that is executed last in the high probability state, the game is changed to the low probability state after the lottery at the start of the game, so the low probability state is in the game. Since the determination is made in the probability state, there is a high possibility that a special game state will occur. In addition, since the specific game state is produced until the end of the game, the left-handed instruction notification is not performed.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
FIG. 35 shows hard random number acquisition processing (steps X492 and X500) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing. In this hard random number acquisition process, first, start opening no winning information is set (step X511), and it is determined whether there is an input to the target switch (step X512).

  If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. When there is an input to the target switch (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; Y), the big hit random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step X515). Then, the start opening winning presence information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 36 shows the special start port 1 switch process (step X498) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure starting port 1 switch process, first, the number of times of starting port signal 1 output, which is the number of times the information related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 36 is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10, is loaded. (Step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (Step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (Step X523). If the output count does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 1 output count area (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold count (first start storage count) Is less than the upper limit value (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255, but if the upper limit is stored, looping by +1 update results in 0, so the updated value is not saved.

  When the special figure 1 holding number is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (step X525; Y), a special figure 1 information setting flag used for distribution of the variation pattern in the special figure holding information determination process described later is set ( Step X526), the special figure 1 holding number is updated by +1 (Step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process described above is used as the RWM big hit random number. Save in the storage area (step X529).

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, the small hit design random number is extracted and saved in the small hit design random number storage area of the RWM (step X532). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, a special figure hold information determination process (step X534), which is a pre-read process, is performed to prepare a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (step X535), and an effect command setting process is performed ( Step X536), the special figure starting port 1 switch processing is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) serves as first start storage means that can store the first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure hold information determination process (step X534) in the special figure start port 1 switch process described above. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory. In this special figure hold information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is in effect (step X541). If it is in a high probability state (step X541; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. . If not in the high probability state (step X541; N), it is determined whether or not the big special hit state, that is, the first special game state which is a special game state based on the big hit (step X542).

  If it is a big hit (step X542; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot is not being hit (step X542; N), a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not (step X543). If the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). A pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not (step X547). ). If the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), stop symbol information for small hit is set (step X549), and a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), the stop symbol information for the outage is set (step X550), and a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  After preparing a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), an effect command setting process is performed (step X552). Next, special figure 1 information setting processing (step X553) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing is performed (step X554).

  Then, pre-reading variation pattern commands corresponding to the first-half variation number indicating the first-half variation pattern and the second-half variation number representing the second-half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game are prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X556), and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process in step X554 are processes executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the special figure 1 normal process. It is the same.

  By the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory and the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory are included. A prefetch variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether big hit or small hit or variation pattern type) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is used as the special figure 1 fluctuation based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory. The effect control device 300 can be notified before the start timing of the display game, and in particular, the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 is changed, for example, from the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game. It becomes possible to notify the player of the result related information before.

  That is, the game control device 100 may determine the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. A possible first determination means. In addition, the game control device 100 uses the start memory (one or a plurality of random numbers stored as the start memory) stored in the start winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory. (E.g., whether or not a special result is obtained) is determined beforehand. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

  This special figure hold information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game that does not generate a start memory for holding the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done. Also, the prefetch process is not performed when the probability is high.

  However, the special figure 2 variable display game does not generate a start memory for deferring the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. There is a high possibility that only the display game is played. In such a case, a pre-reading effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first start memories that perform such pre-reading effects, pre-reading processing is performed for those that occurred before the start of the specific gaming state, so the results are used to determine what occurred after the start of the specific gaming state. The prefetching process is performed on the target of such prefetching effects. Of course, the prefetch process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and it may be determined whether or not to perform a prefetch effect based on the result of the prefetch process in another process.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 38 shows the special start port 2 switch process (step X508) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 2 switch process, first, the start port signal 2 output count, which is the number of times information related to the number of wins to the second start winning port 37, is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 is loaded. (Step X561), the loaded value is updated by +1 (Step X562), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (Step X563). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 2 output count area (step X564), and the start port 2 (second start winning port 37) wins. Determine if it is invalid.

  The start port 2 winning is invalid means that the special figure 1 variable display game that has a special result (big hit or small win) is stopped (during special figure display processing described later), in the first or second special game state, and The special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. When the start port 2 winning is invalid (step X565; Y), the special drawing start port 2 switch process is terminated. If the start port 2 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), the special figure 2 holding number is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for the special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). ), The jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process described above is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, the small hitting design random number is extracted and saved in the small hitting design random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure starting port 2 switch process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a start winning storage means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the second start winning opening 37. Note that the variation pattern random number 1 is not used for the special figure 2 variation display game because there are few variation patterns.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above. The control of the whole process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the special figure 1 display are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 suspension flag that is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is suspended is set (step Y100). When the special figure 1 suspension flag is not set (step Y100; N), that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended, the process proceeds to step Y101, and the following special figure 1 is executed. Processing related to the variable display game is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 suspension flag is set (step Y100; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y101 to Y118. Without proceeding to step Y119. As a result, during the interruption of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

  In step Y101, it is determined whether the special figure 2 big hit / small hit is in effect, that is, whether the special game state is being executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or small hit. (Step Y101). If the special figure 2 is not in big hit / small hit (step Y101; N), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated ( Step Y103). If the big hit / small hit shown in FIG. 2 is in effect (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103.

  In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, the game balls of the upper big prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the lower big prize port switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39 are played. A process for monitoring detection is performed. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119, and the subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y105). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y106), and a subroutine call is made with the special figure 1 game process number (step Y107).

  If the special figure 1 game process number is “0” in step Y107, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, 1 Special processing (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation is performed (step Y108). When the special figure 1 game process number is “1” in step Y107, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process is shown. One fluctuation processing (step Y109) is performed.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of the big hit, A special figure 1 in-display process (step Y110) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process, and the like.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, updating of the number of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y111) to be performed is performed. If the special figure 1 game process number is “4” in step Y107, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if the final round is a final round, A special winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening or the special figure 1 A big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is performed. In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game process number is "6", special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal process (step Y108). I do.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big prize opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hitting process. The small hitting fanfare process (step Y115) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “8”, a small hitting process (step Y116) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step Y117) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. If the special figure 1 game process number is “10” in step Y107, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process is performed.

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and a symbol fluctuation control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. FIG. 1 ends the game process. This special figure 1 game process performs a series of execution control related to the first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
FIG. 40 shows the special figure 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, the whole process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled and the display of the special figure 2 is set. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

  In this special figure 2 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 suspension flag that is set when the special figure 2 variable display game is suspended is set (step Y130). When the special figure 2 suspension flag is not set (step Y130; N), that is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended, the process proceeds to step Y131, and the following special figure 2 is performed. Processing related to the variable display game is performed. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 suspension flag is set (step Y130; Y), that is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game in steps Y131 to Y151. Without moving to step Y152. As a result, during the interruption of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

  In step Y131, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit / small hit is in effect, that is, whether the special game state is being executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or small hit. (Step Y131). Then, if the special figure 1 is not big hit / small hit (step Y131; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated ( Step Y133). Further, when the big hit / small hit shown in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y133.

  In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, the game balls of the upper big prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the lower big prize port switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39 are played. A process for monitoring detection is performed. In the special figure 2 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y152 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, is the special figure 2 game processing timer repeated 0? Is determined (step Y135).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is long. The variation timer value (here 60000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

  In order to prevent a player from intentionally executing a special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of occurrence in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the variation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of measuring the specified time (here 60000 ms).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game process timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register. (Step Y136). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y137), and a subroutine call is made with the special figure 2 game process number (step Y138).

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “0” at step Y138, the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, 2 Special processing (step Y139) for performing setting of information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation is performed (step Y139). When the special figure 2 game process number is “1” in step Y138, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 2, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2. Processing during fluctuation (step Y140) is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the big hit type, A special figure 2 display process (step Y141) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “3” in step Y138, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big prize opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y142) to be performed is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “4” in step Y138, an interval command is set if the big win round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if it is the final round, A special winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, or special figure 2 The big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is performed. In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is "6", special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

  In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is “7”, to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the mid-small process The small hitting fanfare process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “8” at step Y138, the small hitting process (step Y147) for setting the ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, and the like is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “9” in step Y138, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, A small hit remaining sphere process (step Y148) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “10” in step Y138, special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 ordinary process is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. FIG. 2 ends the game process. This special figure 2 game process performs a series of execution control related to the second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). The above special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the above special figure 1 game process for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
FIG. 41 shows the special winning opening switch monitoring process (steps Y102 and Y132) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (step Y161). If the upper prize winning opening is open (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. If the top prize winning opening is not open (step Y161; N), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball processing of the top prize winning opening is in progress (step Y162). It should be noted that the remaining ball processing in this determination includes both large winning opening remaining ball processing based on big hits and small hit remaining ball processing based on small hits.

  When the remaining ball processing of the top prize winning opening is being performed (step Y162; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. Further, when the remaining ball processing of the upper prize winning opening is not in progress (step Y162; N), it is determined whether the lower prize winning opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is being opened (step Y163). When the lower prize winning opening is not being opened (step Y163; N), the big winning prize switch monitoring process is terminated. If the lower major prize opening is being opened (step Y163; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch (step Y164).

  It should be noted that during the opening in steps Y161 and Y163, the special game state based on the first special result (big hit), the special game state based on the first special game state, and the second special result (small hit). Including both being released in the second special gaming state. Further, in the determination of steps Y161 to Y163, the determination may be made with reference to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 game processing number, or a flag indicating whether or not each state is set. You may make it determine based on this flag.

  If there is no input to the lower prize winning opening switch (step Y164; N), the big winning prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When there is an input to the lower prize winning opening switch (step Y164; Y), 1 is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize added in the current big prize opening switch monitoring process. (Step Y165), the process proceeds to Step Y175.

  On the other hand, when the upper prize winning opening is open (step Y161; Y) or when the remaining ball processing of the upper prize winning opening is being performed (step Y162; Y), the winning counter is set to 0. Set (step Y166). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 1 (one upper prize winning switch 38a) (step Y167). If there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y171.

  When there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 1 (step Y167; Y), a prize winning count command is prepared (step Y168), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y169). In the case of the first special variable winning device 38, a big winning mouth count command is transmitted in order to produce an effect by winning. Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper large prize opening switch 2 (the other upper big prize opening switch 38a) (step Y171).

  If there is no input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (step Y171; N), the process proceeds to step Y175. When there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (step Y171; Y), a prize winning count command is prepared (step Y172), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y173). Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y174), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

  Thereafter, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step Y176; Y), or when the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step Y177; Y). If it is any of the above, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y175; N), the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step Y176; N), and the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step Y177; N), the winning is achieved. The value of the counter is added to the number of winning prizes (step Y178), and it is determined whether the number of winning prizes is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (step Y179).

  When the number of the big winning mouth count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (9 in this case) (step Y179; N), the big winning mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the number of the big winning mouth count is kept at the upper limit (step Y180), and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to zero. (Step Y181). Then, it is determined whether the game is being released in the big hit, that is, in the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the big hit (step Y182).

  When the big hit is not being released (step Y182; N), that is, when the big hit is being opened, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, when the big hit is being released (step Y182; Y), the big hit opening operation end value is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step Y183), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

  It should be noted that even when there is an input to the lower prize winning switch (step Y164; Y), the prize winning count command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300. Also, if there is a remaining ball process for the lower major prize opening, a special prize count command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 even if there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch during the remaining ball process. Anyway.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
FIG. 42 shows the special figure 1 routine process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can be changed (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game that is a big hit or the small hit to the end of the special gaming state. In addition, while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in this case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  When the special figure 1 is not ready to be changed (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 routine process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 routine process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). When the left hand instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been completed (step Y202; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y204). Thereafter, a left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when a special figure variation display game that was last performed in a specific gaming state that is in a high-probability state is finished, and thereby a normal gaming state that is in a low-probability state A left-handed instruction notification will be performed when moving to.

  If the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. If the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step Y206; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y208). After that, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing for setting information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y210), and a special figure special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y211). Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step Y212). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is held. The number-of-holds command corresponding to the special figure 1 number of reserves minus 1 is prepared.

  Next, the special figure status area is set (information addition) during special figure 1 fluctuation (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed, the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed, Special figure status 2 shows a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, special figure status 3 shows a state in which both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are executed, and special figure status 4 is a first special gaming state which is a special gaming state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether the high probability state is being reached (step Y213). And when it is in a high probability state (step Y213; Y), it transfers to step Y216. If not in the high probability state (step Y213; N), it is determined whether the high probability final variation is in progress (step Y214). High probability final variation means that the special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) since the end of the first special gaming state. The last special figure change display game that has been executed is being executed.

  When the high-probability final change is being performed (step Y214; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step Y214; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 routine process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Regular Processing]
FIG. 43 shows the special figure 2 normal process (step Y139) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 ordinary process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to change (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit or small hit, to the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in this case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  When the special figure 2 cannot be changed (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 ordinary process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 ordinary process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 2 can be changed (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 holding number is 0 (step Y222). As described above, the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is based on the winning when the second starting prize opening 37 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. The special figure 2 is generated temporarily to start the variable display game, and is not for suspending the start of the special figure variable display game as in the first start memory.

  If the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step Y222; N), a change start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y224). Thereafter, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for setting information on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and special figure 2 fluctuation is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is in effect (step Y227). And when it is in a high probability state (step Y227; Y), it transfers to step Y230. If not in the high probability state (step Y227; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y228). High probability final variation means that the special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) since the end of the first special gaming state. The last special figure change display game that has been executed is being executed.

  When the high-probability final change is being performed (step Y228; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. If the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step Y228; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. Thereafter, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 ordinary process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step Y231). Then, when the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232). If special figure 1 is not changing (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y233). If not disclosed (step Y233; N), the customer waiting state is set. Performs processing related to settings. Further, when the special figure 1 holding number is not 0 (step Y231; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232; Y), or when the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y233; Y). Then, the process proceeds to step Y237.

  In the process for setting the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step Y234), and a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235). Command setting processing is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By setting the customer waiting demo command to correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens depending on the probability state.

  In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 that does not have a backup function loses game state information, so that it is impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to produce an effect according to the gaming state from the reception of this command, and to transmit the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state. It becomes possible to return to the production according to the gaming state earlier than waiting.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed simultaneously, and the probability state may be changed by the processing for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Therefore, a variation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). Thereby, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state in the effect control device 300.

  In addition, since the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure variation display game is started, even when the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the gaming state is performed from the reception of this command. It is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the gaming state earlier than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state to be transmitted. In addition, you may make it include other information for returning to the production | presentation according to a game state, when the production | presentation control apparatus 300 restarts in a customer waiting demo command or a change start probability information command.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the special figure 1 ordinary process described above. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. First, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of place information. The big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern 1 information setting process (step Y244) is performed, and a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step Y245).

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting a fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on are determined. Thereafter, a process for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed simultaneously.

  Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Display Game and Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Display Game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived, the other is interrupted or forcibly terminated as a result It is supposed to be. Therefore, even if the production is being performed, the result is forcibly stopped due to the result of being disengaged or interrupted in the middle, and the player has a feeling of distrust or discomfort. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will be ended before the special figure 1 variable display game to be started, the production can be set in consideration of this.

  For this purpose, first, it is determined whether or not the state is in a high probability state (step Y248). If the state is in a high probability state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In the case of a high probability state, the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game. In this state, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and is frequently executed, it is known that the special figure 1 variable display game is likely to be interrupted. In the game, special effects are not performed here because the effects are set in advance so as not to cause inconvenience due to interruption. An effect that causes inconvenience due to interruption is an effect that makes it difficult to perform an additional effect as described with reference to FIG.

  If not in the high probability state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y249). High probability final variation means that the special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) since the end of the first special gaming state. The last special figure change display game that has been executed is being executed.

  When the high-probability final fluctuation is being performed (step Y249; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. Since the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is the high probability final fluctuation is stopped in a short time, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game started from now is highly likely to be interrupted in a short time. Therefore, even if an effect with high expectation is selected for the special figure 1 variable display game, it is interrupted before the start of the effect, so that an effect causing inconvenience due to the interruption is not selected here. No processing is performed.

  If the high probability final change is not in progress (step Y249; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is changing (step Y250). If the special figure 2 is not changing (step Y250; N), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since it is in a low probability state, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started from now on, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a very long fluctuation time. Therefore, since the possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted is low, here, the process for preventing the production that causes inconvenience due to the interruption is not performed.

  If the special figure 2 is changing (step Y250; Y), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier, so that an effect that causes inconvenience due to interruption is not selected. No processing is performed.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252; N), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is calculated (step Y253), and the special figure 1 fluctuation display to be executed from now on. It is determined whether the game variation time is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254). When the variation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game is ended first, no processing is performed to prevent an effect that causes inconvenience due to interruption.

  Further, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), the fact that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is longer is notified. A command is prepared (step Y255), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y256). After that, a high probability variation number update process for managing the period of the high probability state is performed (step Y257), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated. In the production control device 300, based on receiving a command notifying that the variation time of the special figure 1 is longer, the production control device 300 restricts the selection of the production that causes an inconvenience due to interruption in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The process is to be performed.

  When the variation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) is set. It is also possible to perform a process of resetting information related to the variation pattern (first and second half variation pattern numbers, etc.) so that the effect control device 300 changes to a variation pattern that does not select an effect that causes inconvenience due to interruption. In the process of resetting the variation pattern, the variation time may not be changed or may be changed. Further, the process (step Y255) for preparing a command for notifying that the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 is longer may be performed or may not be performed.

  That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern process (step Y246) performed in the game control device 100 determines the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal gaming state. First variation mode determination means is provided that can determine the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Furthermore, the process for resetting the variation pattern performed in the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determination means. Is being executed, with reference to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game, information regarding the variation pattern can be obtained without changing the variation time of the first variation display game that has been determined. It constitutes a second variation mode determination means that can be determined again.

  Also, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed when the fluctuation pattern is decided in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). The process of determining whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254) is performed, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the game situation is determined from the beginning. You may do it.

  In addition, when a special result can be selected as the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed from now on only when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special result. The process (step Y254) which determines whether it is less than the remaining fluctuation time of FIG. 2 fluctuation display game is performed. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of order, the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted, so this processing is unnecessary.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 ordinary process. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. First, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is out of place information. The big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special symbol 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern 2 information setting processing (step Y264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set. (Step Y265).

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step Y267) is performed. By these processes, the result and variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed from now on are determined. After that, a high probability variation number update process for managing the period of high probability state is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 variation start process is terminated.

  In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, a process for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that can be executed simultaneously is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, and the special figure 2 variable display game is less likely to be interrupted. However, as in the special figure 1 variable display game, the selection of effects that may cause inconvenience due to interruption may be restricted when interrupted or forcibly stopped by a result of disengagement.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 46 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, a big hit random number is loaded and prepared from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step Y273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 which is a result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y275), and if it is a big hit (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. To do. In other words, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed simultaneously are prevented from being a big hit. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is a big hit (step Y277; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step Y279) is performed to determine whether or not.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y 279) is a small hit (step Y 280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y 271 and saved. (Step Y281), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not the small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 47 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure big hit random number storage area is cleared to zero.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 as a result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. To do. In other words, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed simultaneously are prevented from being a big hit. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed for determining whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is a big hit (step Y297; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the lost information is saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten on the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291 and saved. (Step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 48 shows the big hit determination process (steps Y276 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, the judgment result is set to be off (step Y317), and the big hit determination processing is terminated. Note that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the lottery is lost. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step Y313).

  If it is in a high probability state (step Y313; Y), an upper limit determination value with high probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ). If not in the high probability state (step Y313; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). .

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, the judgment result is set to be off (step Y317), and the big hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step Y318), and the big hit determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 49 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279 and Y299) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). Note that “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and not more than the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination processing is terminated. In addition, the loss as the determination result indicates that the lottery is lost. Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the special figure 1 information is being set, that is, whether the special figure 1 variable display game is being determined. (Step Y322).

  If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y322; N), that is, if the judgment is for the special figure 2 variable display game, a small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; Y), that is, when it is not the small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y327), and the small hit determination process is terminated. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 50 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331). ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step Y332). Next, the special symbol 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol saving area (step Y334). The big hit type is selected by this processing.

  After that, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y337), and the big prize opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. It is saved in the special figure 1 big prize opening release information area (step Y338). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  On the other hand, if it is not big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and if it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol. A small hit design random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step Y340). Next, a special symbol 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol saving area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped in the special symbol 1 stop. The design pattern area is saved (step Y345), and a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure 1 command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and an effect command setting process (step Y348) is performed. This decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350). The small symbol symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is performed on the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361). If it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the big hit symbol random number is stored from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area. Is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area (step Y364). The big hit type is selected by this processing. Note that the special figure (big hit) is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game that saves the special figure 2 variable display game stop symbol in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area. This is because there is a possibility that the result may be forcibly changed to a result of being off.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (step Y367), and the big prize opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. It is saved in the special figure 2 big prize opening release information area (step Y368). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  On the other hand, if it is not big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369). If it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol A small hit design random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, a special symbol 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area (step Y374), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped for the special symbol 2 stop. The design pattern area is saved (step Y375), and a special decoration figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure 2 command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and an effect command setting process (step Y378) is performed. This decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
FIG. 52 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y244) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability is present (step Y401). When the probability is not high (step Y401; N), a variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y402), and first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y403). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit, that is, whether the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y404).

  If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y404; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412. If the special figure 1 big hit is not found (step Y404; N), it is judged whether the special figure 1 small hit, that is, whether the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a small hit stop symbol pattern (step Y405). If the special figure 1 is not small hit (step Y405; N), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step Y407. When the special figure 1 is small (step Y405; Y), the special figure 1 holding number is added to the latter half offset data to update the value (step Y406), and the special figure 1 holding number is added to the first half offset data. The value is converted by addition (step Y407), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

  On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y401; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit (step Y408). If the special figure 1 is not the big hit (step Y408; N), the first half offset data for the high probability probability special figure 1 deviation / small hit is set (step Y409), and the special figure 1 length fluctuation second half offset data is set. Set (step Y411). In the case of special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; Y), the first half offset data for high probability special figure 1 big hit is set (step Y410), and the latter half offset data for special figure 1 length fluctuation is set. (Step Y411).

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y412), and the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y413). The setting process ends.

  That is, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state, in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation pattern considering the special figure 1 holding number is determined for both the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern, and in the case of a loss In the case of the first half variation pattern, the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 holding number, and in the case of big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 holding number. Further, in the special figure 1 variable display game in the specific gaming state, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 holding number.

[Special figure 2 information setting process]
FIG. 53 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y264) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a high probability (step Y421). When the probability is high (step Y421; Y), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y422), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y423). ), The process proceeds to step Y428.

  On the other hand, when the probability is not high (step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit (step Y424). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y424; N), the low-probability special figure 2 is set for the first half offset data for losing / small hits (step Y425), and the special figure 2 length fluctuation second half offset data is set. Set (step Y427). In the case of special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; Y), first half offset data for special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y426), and latter half offset data for special figure 2 length fluctuation is set. (Step Y427).

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y428), and the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y429), and the special figure 2 information is saved. The setting process ends.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Setting Process]
FIG. 54 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  In the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and an address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452). Then, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. 1 and prepared (step Y453).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is out of sync, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuous stop symbol pattern (step Y454). If the special figure 1 is out of alignment (step Y454; Y), a 2-byte sorting process is performed. (Step Y455), the process proceeds to Step Y457. If the special figure 1 is not shifted (step Y454; N), a sorting process is performed (step Y456), and the process proceeds to step Y457. When the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but when the result is out of order, the distribution value is 2 bytes to enable a variety of effects.

  Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. To prepare (step Y458). Then, a sorting process (step Y459) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the determined second half variation number (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. Preparation is made (step Y464).

  Then, a sorting process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y467), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the whole period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started from now is set.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Setting Processing]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the latter half fluctuation selection address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). Then, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area of FIG. 2 and prepared (step Y473).

  Next, a sorting process is performed (step Y474), the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y475). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Then, the first half variation group table is set (step Y476), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the determined second half variation number (step Y477). Next, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y478), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of FIG. 2 and prepared (step Y479). ).

  Then, a sorting process (step Y480) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y481), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is terminated. The first half variation pattern is set by this processing, and the variation pattern for the whole period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started from now is set. In the special figure 2 variation display game, since there are few types of variation in the latter half, the variation pattern is determined using only the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 without selecting the latter variation group by the variation pattern random number 1.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 56 shows a 2-byte sorting process (step Y455) in the above-described special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared second-half fluctuation group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step Y501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. Since there is no need for distribution in the variation group table, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the data address corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process ends. To do. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter half fluctuation group table is not a code without sorting (step Y502; N), the first sorting value specified in the latter half fluctuation group table is acquired (step Y503).

  Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y373 from the loaded random value (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step Y504), and the calculated new random value Is smaller than “0” (step Y505). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y506), the process proceeds to step Y503 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired in step Y503, the distribution value is subtracted with the random number determined in step Y505 as a new random value, and a new random value is further subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step Y504). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step Y505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step Y505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 57 shows the distribution process (steps Y456, Y459, Y465, Y474, Y480) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared latter half variation selection table (selection table) and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). (Step Y511). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code with no sorting (step Y512; Y), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step Y517), and the sorting is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the first data of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step Y513).

  Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step Y513 from the loaded random value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) (Step Y514), and then the calculation It is determined whether or not the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step Y515; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the process proceeds to step Y513, and thereafter Process.

  That is, in step Y513, after the distribution value specified next in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted with the random number value determined in step Y515 as a new random value. Further, a new random value is calculated (step Y514). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y515).

  The above processing is executed in step Y515 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation number or the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in step Y515 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step Y517), and the distribution process is terminated. To do.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 58 shows the change start information setting process (steps Y247 and Y267) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process and special figure 2 change start process. In this variation start information setting process, it is first determined whether or not the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y551). If the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), The random number storage area (for the hold number 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y552). Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y551; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, the random number storage areas of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the special figure 2 are cleared (step). Y553).

  Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step Y556), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step Y558), and the added value is saved in the target special game process timer area (step Y559).

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state which is in the low probability state is out of play or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, as the above-described addition value, the remaining time (time less than 60000 ms) is calculated as the addition value except for the time that can be measured using the number of repetitions that is the number of times of measuring the specified time (here 60000 ms). It has come to be.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y560). If the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y560; Y), the process proceeds to step Y564. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y560; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y561). The long fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that is set when the result is out of play or a small hit in the normal game state for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and is determined by the set fluctuation pattern number.

  If it is not the start of the long fluctuation in FIG. 2 (step Y561; N), 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y562), and the process proceeds to step Y564. If it is the start of the long fluctuation in FIG. 2 (step Y561; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y563), and the process proceeds to step Y564.

  Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step Y564), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step Y565), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y566). ). Next, it is determined whether the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y567). If the information of FIG. 1 is not being set (step Y567; N), the variation start information setting process is terminated. If the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y567; Y), the number of reserved special figure 1 is updated by -1 (step Y568), and the contents of the random number storage area of special figure 1 are shifted (step Y569). ) Clear the free area after the shift (step Y570), and end the variation start information setting process.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 displays the result of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the variation mode information on the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. First determination means that can be determined at the time of starting (before the start). Further, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37, and the result of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the predetermined random number. And a second determination means capable of determining the variation mode information at the start (before the start) of the second variation display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where a game ball launched to one side of the game area 32 can be won, and the second start winning opening 37 is fired to the other side of the game area 32. The game ball is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time that can specify the execution time of the variation display game, and in the normal state (normal game state) The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the second determination unit is larger than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination unit. It will be a long time.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that contain information about patterns. It should be noted that the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . Further, it can be said that the first variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variation display game from the entire special figure 1 game processing. Further, the game control device 100 serves as second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . Further, it can be said that the second variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variation display game from the entire special figure 2 game processing.

  Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination unit and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination unit. As transmission means that can be transmitted to the production control means (production control device 300). In addition, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time in response to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and the variation time has elapsed, It serves as a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

  In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state which is in a low probability state is out of play or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. Information about time may not be transmitted to the production control device 300, but a command indicating only a long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of a long variation, it is sufficient to simply display the variation, and there is no need to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command indicating the long variation. The variation time is managed only by the game control device 100, and when the variation time ends, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 stops the variable display based on receiving the stop command. Like that. If it does in this way, the burden of control in production control device 300 can be eased.

[High probability change count update processing]
FIG. 59 shows the high probability variation frequency update processing (steps Y257 and Y268) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this high probability variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability is present (step Y581), and if not high probability (step Y581; N), the high probability variation number update process is terminated. If the probability is high (step Y581; Y), the high probability variation count for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state is updated by -1 (step Y582), and the high probability variation count is updated. Is determined to be 0 (step Y583).

  If the high probability variation number is not 0 (step Y583; N), that is, if the high probability state continues, the high probability variation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (step Y583; Y), that is, when the high-probability state is to be ended, a signal related to high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to be OFF. Further, a signal related to the high probability state and the end of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.

  Further, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). Then, the high probability final variation flag corresponding to the symbol for which variation starts is set (step Y588), and the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the high probability state is set until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the special game state is finished, but the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display are performed. Since the game can be executed at the same time, the high-probability variation number update process for managing the number of high-probability states is performed at the start of the special figure variation display game. If it is a gaming machine that does not execute one special figure fluctuation display game while the other special figure fluctuation display game is being executed as in the prior art, the probability state is not changed until the predetermined special figure fluctuation display game is finished. There is no problem if you change to a low probability state. However, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is set to a low probability at the end of the predetermined special figure variable display game. If the state is changed to the state, the determination is made with a high probability state even for the other special figure fluctuation display game started during the execution of the one special figure fluctuation display game, and the high probability over a predetermined number of times. The game can be executed in the state. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, one special figure variable display game which is the predetermined number of times is displayed in a high probability state. After the determination, it is necessary to be in a low probability state before the start of the other special figure variation display game. Here, immediately after the start processing for one special figure variation display game which is the predetermined number of times is finished. It is possible to change to a low probability state.

  As described above, since the high probability variation number update process is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state is changed. The display is already in a low probability state. Therefore, if other processing is performed with reference to the actual probability state during the variation display of the special figure variation display game, the processing is performed as a low probability state, which may cause inconvenience. is there. Therefore, the special probability variation display game is set with a high probability final variation flag so that it can be handled as a game executed as a high probability state. In addition, the high probability final variation flag is information that can determine whether the last special diagram variation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state is a special diagram 1 variation display game or a special diagram 2 variation display game. Is included.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
FIG. 60 shows a special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 normal process. In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). Furthermore, an initial value is set in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

  The initial value set in the special symbol 1 changing symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display starts from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 ordinary process. In this special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Further, an initial value is set in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

  The initial value to be set in the special symbol 2 changing symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display starts when all segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

  In addition, when starting the variable display in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is started from a state in which all the segments are turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any result mode, and if there is a segment that is not used in any result mode, the variable display is started at least from the state in which the segment is lit. You may make it do. Alternatively, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is always turned on. Moreover, the lighting mode at the time of starting a fluctuation | variation by the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be the same, and may differ.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating Processing]
62 and 63 show the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepared (step Y622), and an effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step Y623).

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y625). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the final variation has a high probability (step Y626). When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game has high probability final fluctuation, the high probability final fluctuation flag of special figure 1 is set. If the final fluctuation is not a high probability (step Y626; N), a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627), and the process proceeds to step Y629 shown in FIG. If it is a high-probability final change (step Y626; Y), the display time at the time of the high-probability final change is set (step Y628), and the process proceeds to step Y629 shown in FIG. Note that the display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game set here is 600 ms in the case of outage, 2000 ms in the case of big hit, and 136 ms in the case of small hit if it is not a high probability final fluctuation. Display time is set. In the case of a high probability final variation, a display time of 7000 ms is set regardless of the result.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is out of order, that is, whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place (step Y629). If the special figure 1 is out of place (step Y629; Y), the process proceeds to step Y648. If the special figure 1 is not out of place (step Y629; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y630). Whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y630; N), the process proceeds to step Y644. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y630; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit game, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (step Y631). ). If the special figure 1 is not big hit (step Y631; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (step Y632), and the decorative special figure 2 interruption command is set. Is prepared (step Y633), an effect command setting process (step Y634) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y644.

  That is, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The suspended special figure 2 variable display game is resumed when the special gaming state (second special gaming state) based on the small hit (second special result) ends.

  On the other hand, if it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y631; Y), it is determined whether special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y635). In other words, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped by the result of the loss based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

  When the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y635; Y), the process proceeds to step Y637. If the special figure 2 display process is not in progress (step Y635; N), the symbol determination count output count is updated by +1 (step Y636), and the special figure 1 display time set above as the special figure 2 display time. A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y637). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y638), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y639), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y640). ). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y641), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y642), and a special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y643).

  Then, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saved in the winning symbol command area (step Y644), whether the special figure 1 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y645). If the special figure is a small hit (step Y645; Y), the process proceeds to step Y648. If it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y645; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y646). ), The information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening information area and saved in the large winning opening information area (step Y647).

  After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y648), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y649). The displaying process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Processing]
FIG. 64 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times output is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded from the special figure 2 command area and prepared (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is executed. Perform (step Y653).

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y655). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the final variation has a high probability (step Y656). When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has high probability final fluctuation, the high probability final fluctuation flag of special figure 2 is set.

  If the final variation is not a high probability (step Y656; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657), and the process proceeds to step Y659. In the case of a high probability final variation (step Y656; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final variation is set (step Y658), and the process proceeds to step Y659. The display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game set here is 600 ms regardless of the result if it is not a high probability final fluctuation, and regardless of the result if it is a high probability final fluctuation. A display time of 7000 ms is set.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is out of order, that is, whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of place (step Y659). If the special figure 2 is out of place (step Y659; Y), the process proceeds to step Y668. If the special figure 2 is not out of step (step Y659; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y660). Whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y660; N), the process proceeds to step Y664. When the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y660; Y), the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y661), and a special figure 1 interruption command is prepared (step Y662). Then, an effect command setting process (step Y663) is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y664.

  In other words, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is interrupted based on the special result (big hit or small hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The suspended special figure 1 variable display game is a special game state (first special game state) based on a big hit (first special result) or a special game state (second special game state) based on a small hit (second special result). Will be resumed at the end of.

  In step Y664, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saved in the winning symbol command area (step Y664), and whether it is special figure 2 small hit, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is small hit. It is determined whether there is any (step Y665). If the special figure 2 is a small hit (step Y665; Y), the process proceeds to step Y668. If it is not the special figure 2 small hit (step Y665; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y666). ), Information is loaded from the special figure 2 big prize opening information area and saved in the big prize opening information area (step Y667).

  Thereafter, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y668), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y669). The displaying process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 1]
FIG. 65 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y649) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, a special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and a process number is stored in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

  Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684). ), The special figure 1 changing process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 1]
FIG. 66 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y669) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, a special figure 2 game process number “2” relating to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and a process number is stored in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

  Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y694). ), The special figure 2 changing process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 2]
FIG. 67 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y643) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, a special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and a process number is stored in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 is displayed. A stop flag related to the change stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y724).

  Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, and thereafter, setting of information for obtaining a result of losing is performed. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y726).

  Next, the special figure 2 big winning opening information area is cleared (step Y727), the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729). ). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area is cleared (step Y730), the shift stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y731), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is finished. .

  62 to 67, when one special figure fluctuation display game has a special result, the other special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted or forcibly stopped by the result of being off. Here, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, an end control process is performed for forcibly stopping the special figure 2 variable display game with the result of disengagement. Also, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, and the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted is resumed after the special game state based on the small hit is completed. Resume control to be performed. In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted after the special game state based on the big hit or the small hit is completed after the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted based on the big hit or the small hit. Resumption control for resuming the display game is performed.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
68 and 69 show the special figure 1 display process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the small hit flag is set. One area is cleared (step Y752).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step Y753), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit information (step Y755). If it is not a big hit (step Y755; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. In the case of a big hit (step Y755; Y), a test signal related to the start of the special figure 1 variable display game big hit (special figure 1 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device is activated) The medium signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

  Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is prepared (step Y757), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal variation notification ends with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. Thereafter, a round number upper limit table is set (step Y759), and the round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4 or 2 in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained to obtain the round number upper limit value. Save in the area (step Y760). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

  Next, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the symbol symbol command area and prepared (step Y762), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y763). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y765).

  Next, a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special winning opening information and the special figure display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the present embodiment, in step Y766, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, a jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is ON when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned OFF. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is OFF when the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned ON.

  Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the big prize opening information is set (step Y767), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). . Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the top large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y769).

  If it is a big hit to open the upper prize winning opening (step Y769; Y), the upper prize winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y770), and the illegal extra monitoring period flag is set in the upper winning prize illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step Y771), and the process proceeds to step Y774. In addition, when it is not a big hit to open the upper big prize opening (step Y769; N), that is, when it is a big hit to open the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), the lower big prize opening illegal prize number area Is cleared (step Y772), the fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the lower large winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y773), and the process proceeds to step Y774.

  Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y774) and saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y775). Furthermore, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step Y755, if Special Figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, if big hit flag 1 is out of place information, it is determined whether loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y777). If the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation, that is, whether it is the last special figure variation display game in which a lottery is performed in a high probability state. Determination is made (step Y778).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y778; N), the process proceeds to step Y783. If the final variation is high probability (step Y778; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y779), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y780). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y781), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y782). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, a left-handed instruction notification command is set and notification for instructing left-handed is performed in the special process shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y783), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether a high probability is in progress (step Y787).

  When the probability is not high (step Y787; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handed is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y787; Y), a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right turn is made.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit to open the top prize winning opening (first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) (step Y792), and if it is a small hit to open the top big winning opening (step Y792; Y), The upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y793), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper big winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and the process proceeds to step Y797. In addition, when it is not a small hit to open the upper large winning opening (step Y792; N), that is, when it is a small hit to open the lower large winning opening (the second special variable winning apparatus 39), an illegal winning of the lower large winning opening is performed. The number area is cleared (step Y795), the fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y796), and the process proceeds to step Y797. Then, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y797) is performed, and the special figure 1 display mid-process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), it is a high probability final variation, that is, the last special drawing in which a lottery in a high probability state is performed. It is determined whether the game is a variable display game (step Y798).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y798; N), the process proceeds to step Y806. If it is a high probability final variation (step Y798; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y799), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y800). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y801), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y802).

  Next, it is determined whether the game is in the second special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 2, that is, the small hit generated in the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y803). If it is during the small hit of special figure 2 (step Y803; Y), the process proceeds to step Y806. As a result, the state of instructing the right handing is maintained. Further, when the special figure 2 is not in a small hit (step Y803; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y804), and the game state display number 2 area is in the left-handed state. The number is saved (step Y805). Thereafter, the special figure status area in the special figure status 1 is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y806), the special figure 1 normal process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y807), and the special figure 1 display process is terminated. .

[Special figure 2 display processing]
FIG. 70 and FIG. 71 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 display process, a process equivalent to the above-described special figure 1 display process is performed for special figure 2. In the special figure 2 display processing, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y812).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, the special figure 2 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit information (step Y815). If it is not a big hit (step Y815; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. Also, in the case of a big hit (step Y815; Y), a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device is activated) The middle signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

  Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is prepared (step Y817), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal variation notification ends with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. Thereafter, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y819), and the round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4 or 2 in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained to obtain the round number upper limit value. Save in the area (step Y820). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

  Next, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the symbol symbol command area and prepared (step Y822), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y823). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y825).

  Next, a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big win in the special winning opening information and the special figure changing display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the present embodiment, in step Y826, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, a jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is ON when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned OFF. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is OFF when the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned ON.

  Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the big prize opening information is set (step Y827), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). . Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the top large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y829).

  If it is a big hit to open the top prize winning opening (step Y829; Y), the upper prize winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step Y830), and the fraud monitoring period flag is set in the upper university winning prize illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step Y831), and the process proceeds to step Y834. In addition, when it is not a big hit to open the upper big prize opening (step Y829; N), that is, when it is a big hit to open the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), the lower big prize opening illegal prize number area Is cleared (step Y832), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y833), and the process proceeds to step Y834.

  Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y834) and saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y835). Furthermore, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y836) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit at step Y815 (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is missing information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). If the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation, that is, whether it is the last special figure variation display game in which a lottery is performed in a high probability state. Determination is made (step Y838).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y838; N), the process proceeds to step Y843. If it is a high probability final variation (step Y838; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y839), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y840). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y841), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y842). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, a left-handed instruction notification command is set and notification for instructing left-handed is performed in the special process shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y843), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y847).

  When the probability is not high (step Y847; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handed is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y847; Y), a signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right turn is made.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit to open the top prize winning opening (first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) (step Y852). If it is a small hit to open the top big winning opening (step Y852; Y), The upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y853), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning portion fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the process proceeds to step Y857. In addition, when it is not a small hit to open the upper large winning opening (step Y852; N), that is, when it is a small hit to open the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39), the illegal winning of the lower large winning opening The number area is cleared (step Y855), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y856), and the process proceeds to step Y857. Then, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 mid-display process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), it is a high probability final variation, that is, the last special drawing in which a lottery is performed in a high probability state. It is determined whether the game is a variable display game (step Y858). If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y858; N), the process proceeds to step Y866. If it is a high probability final variation (step Y858; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y859), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y860). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y861), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y862).

  Next, it is determined whether the game is in the second special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1, that is, the small hit generated in the special figure 1 variable display game (step Y863). If it is during the small hit in FIG. 1 (step Y863; Y), the process proceeds to step Y866. As a result, the state of instructing the right handing is maintained. Further, when the small hit in FIG. 1 is not in progress (step Y863; N), a signal related to the left hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y864), and the game state display number 2 area is in the left handed state. The number is saved (step Y865). Thereafter, the special figure status area in the special figure 2 fluctuation is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y866), the special figure 2 normal process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y867), and the special figure 2 displaying process is terminated. .

  That is, the first special game in which the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is released with the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has reached the first special result. And a second special game generating means for generating a second special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened without the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has a second special result. Make.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 72 describes details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (steps Y776, Y836) in the above-described special figure 1 display process and special figure 2 display process. In this fanfare / interval process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, one big hit signal that is output in big hit or small hit is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high-probability state and the time-short state (special symbol variation time shortening state) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.

  Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), and the number with a low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874). The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

  Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the high probability state The high probability variation count area for managing the number of games is cleared (step Y877). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Next, the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), and the high probability final fluctuation flag area is cleared (step Y879). Further, a signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y881).

  Thereafter, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area for storing the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation frequency area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process is terminated. That is, all the information related to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is cleared with the occurrence of the big hit.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 73 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y797) in the special figure 1 display middle process described above. In this special figure 1 small hitting fanfare process transition setting process, first, “7” relating to the small hitting fanfare process is set as the process number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, one big hit signal that is output in big hit or small hit is set to ON. Furthermore, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol small hit signal is set to ON.

  After that, the small hitting information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hitting display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure one small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 74 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare process transition setting process (step Y857) in the special figure 2 display process described above. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare process transition setting process, first, “7” relating to the small hit fanfare process is set as the process number (step Y901), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y902).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and a signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, one big hit signal that is output in big hit or small hit is set to ON. Further, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

  After that, the small hitting information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
FIG. 75 shows fanfare / interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y951), and a round command corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y952). (Step Y953).

  Next, the big hit midway processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big hit middle processing control pointer area (step Y955). As an initial value for the big hit processing control pointer, 0 is set when opening and closing is repeated in one round. Here, the 5th R of 16R probability variation F3 (special drawing 2 top winning opening / closing pattern 5) corresponds. Further, in the case of performing one continuous release in one round, 21 is set as the jackpot operation end value. Note that the initial value may be set to other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

  Then, the winning opening opening time corresponding to the winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the process number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, any one of 200 ms, 600 ms, 1600 ms, and 29000 ms.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958). If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y959). ), The special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y958; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y961), and the big prize opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area. (Step Y962).

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) (step Y963). Whether or not it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening can be determined from the set big opening opening information. If it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (step Y963; Y), the process setting process 1 for opening the big winning opening is performed (step Y964), and the fanfare / interval processing is ended. Further, when it is not a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (step Y963; N), the process transition setting process 2 for opening the big winning opening is performed (step Y965), and the process during the fanfare / interval is ended.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 76 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (step Y964). In this special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1, first, a signal related to the opening of the upper winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper winning port on-data is saved in the large winning port solenoid output data area (step Y972), and the number of winnings to the big winning port is counted. The winning prize mouth count is cleared (step Y973), and the winning prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 77 shows the process for setting a process for setting a special winning opening during the above-described fanfare / interval process transition setting process 2 (step Y965). In this special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, a signal related to the opening of the lower large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the open / close door 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39, the lower big prize opening on-data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y982), and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening is counted. The winning prize mouth count is cleared (step Y983), and the winning prize opening opening process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 78 shows the special winning opening opening process (steps Y112, Y143) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the big winning opening opening process, first, the big hit processing control pointer is loaded (step Y1001), and it is determined whether or not the loaded value is equal to or larger than the big hit operation end value (here 21) (step Y1002).

  If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the big hit operation end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002; N), the big hit operation transition setting process is performed (step Y1003), and the big hit middle processing control pointer is updated by +1 (step Y1004). Then, the process for opening the big prize opening is finished. In this case, opening / closing is performed during one round, and the opening / closing mode of the special variable winning device is set according to the updated jackpot processing control pointer.

  On the other hand, if the loaded value is greater than or equal to the jackpot action end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002; Y), the current round number in the special gaming state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area Are compared to determine whether the current round is the final round (step Y1005). If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008) is performed. If it is the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008). I do.

  Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the winning prize opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 related to the winning ball remaining ball processing is set as the process number (step Y1010). As the remaining sphere processing time, 600 ms, 800 ms, or 1400 ms is set. And it is determined whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1011).

  If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1011; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area. (Step Y1015).

  Thereafter, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the special winning opening open process is terminated. In step Y1016, the off data is set for both the upper prize winning solenoid and the lower prize winning solenoid, and the process of closing any of the big winning prizes is performed.

[Big hit action transition setting process]
FIG. 79 shows the big hit operation transition setting process (step Y1004) in the above-described special winning opening opening process. In the big hit operation transition setting process, first, branch processing is performed depending on whether the value of the big hit mid-process control pointer is an even number or an odd number (step Y1021). Here, branch processing is performed assuming that 0 is an even number.

  If the value of the big hit processing control pointer is an even number in step Y1021, a wait time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1022). Here, 1500 ms is set as the wait time. Note that different wait times may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1023), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In step Y1023, off data is set for both the upper prize winning solenoid and the lower prize winning solenoid, and a process for closing any of the big winning prizes is performed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the big hit processing control pointer is an odd number in step Y1021, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1024). Here, when the value of the big hit processing control pointer is 1 to 19 as the big winning opening time, 200 ms is set, and when it is 21, 25000 ms is set. Next, the top prize winning port on-data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (step Y1025), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, only the top prize winning opening (the first special variable prize winning device 38) is repeatedly opened and closed during one round. Therefore, in step Y1024, on data is saved for the top prize winning solenoid. doing. Of course, depending on the setting of the gaming machine, it may be possible to repeat the opening and closing of the lower large prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) in one round.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026). If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026; Y), the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( Step Y1027), the jackpot movement transition setting process is terminated. If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1026; N), the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (step Y1028), and the big hit action transition setting process is terminated. With the above processing, it is possible to repeatedly open and close the big prize opening in one round.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
FIG. 80 shows the big winning opening remaining ball process (steps Y113 and Y144) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this winning ball remaining ball process, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1041).

  If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), a signal related to the end of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the current round number is set (step Y1043), and 3 for the fanfare / interval processing is set as the process number (step Y1044).

  The interval period between rounds is a period from when the remaining sphere processing time elapses from the end of the round to when the interval time elapses after the remaining sphere processing time elapses. For example, in the case of the special prize opening / closing pattern 1 in FIG. 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, the interval period becomes 2000 ms, and the interval effect is displayed on the display device 41 or the like in this interval period. Is executed.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), a big hit end process transition setting process is performed (step Y1045), and an ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y1046), 6 for the special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process is set as the process number (step Y1047).

  And it is determined whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1048). If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (step Y1048). Y1050), the winning prize remaining ball processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1048; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the special winning opening remaining ball processing is terminated.

  The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is a period from the end of the final round until the ending time elapses after the remaining sphere processing time elapses. For example, in the case of the special prize opening / closing pattern 1 on the special figure 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, the ending period is 11000 ms. Is executed.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 81 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step Y1045) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In this jackpot end process transition setting process, first, a signal related to the end of opening of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF.

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (step Y1072), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), Information on the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special game state is cleared (step Y1074).

  Then, the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is cleared (step Y1075), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information of the big hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the big hit end process transition setting process is ended.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 82 shows the special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 big hit ending process, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure 1 ordinary process (step Y1101), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1102).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (special symbol fluctuation time shortening state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1104). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON. Note that the jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1105). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1106). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1107). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, a number having a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1108). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the time is always short during high probability, these numbers are not distinguished from each other and are numbered with high probability. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1109), and the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1110).

  Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1111), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1112). The special figure status area is cleared (step Y1113). Note that clearing the special figure status area results in a special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed.

  After that, a high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1114), and an initial value (here, 50) is stored in the high probability fluctuation frequency area for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state. ) Is saved (step Y1115). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1116), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

  By performing the special figure 1 big hit end process, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interruption process, the special figure 2 game is executed after the special figure 1 game process. In order to perform the process, a special interrupt process that starts the special figure fluctuation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game process by the timer interruption that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end process. Will be able to start first. Therefore, in step Y1117, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area, so that the start process for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interruption.

  In other words, the second variation display game execution control means is the second variation display game execution control means until the first variation display game execution control means can execute the process related to the start of the first variation display game after the game control device 100 ends the special gaming state. A game process standby means is provided for preventing the execution of the process relating to the start of the two-variable display game.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 83 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) in the special figure 2 game process described above. This special figure 2 jackpot end process is equivalent to the above-described process except that the step Y1117 in the special figure 1 big hit process is not performed and the special figure 1 variable display game is restarted.

  First, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure 2 ordinary process (step Y1121), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1122). Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1123). Here, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (special symbol variation time shortening state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1124). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON. Note that the jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1125). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Then, the signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1127). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, a number having a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1128). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the time is always short during high probability, these numbers are not distinguished from each other and are numbered with high probability. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1129), and the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1130).

  Next, the fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1131), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1132). The special figure status area is cleared (step Y1133). Note that clearing the special figure status area results in a special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed.

  Thereafter, a high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1134), and an initial value (here, 50) is stored in the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state. ) Is saved (step Y1135). Further, a probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1137).

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (step Y1137; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1140), and the special figure 2 big hit ending process is terminated. If the special figure 1 variable display game is being interrupted (step Y1137; Y), a decoration special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1138), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1141). Thereafter, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1140), and the special figure 2 big hit ending process is terminated.

  By these special figure 1 big hit process and special figure 2 big hit process, the specific game state which is a high probability state is set until 50 special figure variation display games are executed after the first special game state is finished. . In other words, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game will be a special result is higher than the normal state over a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. Make. Further, the specific game state generating means is configured to increase the probability that the result of the variable display game is the first special result over the predetermined period as the specific game state, compared to the normal state. In addition, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted with the end of the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game is resumed.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process (steps Y115 and Y146) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 84, in the small hitting fanfare process, first, branching is performed using an open pattern (step Y1201).

  In step Y1201, if the opening pattern is 1 per bonus (special figure 1 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1), the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) opening small hitting opening command is prepared. (Step Y1202), an effect command setting process is performed (Step Y1203). Next, 8 is set as the process number for the small hitting process (step Y1204), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1205).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 1 (here 48 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower big prize opening on data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1208), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

  Also, if the opening pattern is 2 in small hits (special figure 2 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1201, the small hitting opening command for opening the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is issued. Preparation (step Y1209) and an effect command setting process are performed (step Y1210). Next, 8 as the process number is set for the small hitting process (step Y1211), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1212).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 2 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower big prize opening on data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

  If the opening pattern is 3 in small hits (special figure 2 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 6) in step Y1201, a small hitting opening command for opening the upper prize winning opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) is issued. Preparation (step Y1216) and effect command setting processing are performed (step Y1217). Next, 8 as the process number is set for the small hitting process (step Y1218), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1219).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 3 (here, 1200 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper prize winning opening on data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

  In addition, if the opening pattern is 4 in small hits (special figure 2 top prize opening opening / closing pattern 7) in step Y1201, the top hitting opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) opening small hits opening command is issued. Preparation (step Y1223) and effect command setting processing are performed (step Y1224). Next, 8 is set as the process number for the small hitting process (step Y1225), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1226).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 4 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the top winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process proceeds to step Y1230. After performing processing according to these types of small hits, the big prize count area for counting the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening is cleared (step Y1230), and the small hit fanfare processing is ended.

[Processing during small hits]
FIG. 85 shows the small hit / medium process (steps Y116 and Y147) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this small hitting process, first, a small hitting end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, branching by an open pattern is performed (step Y1243).

  In step Y1243, if the opening pattern is 1 for small hits (special figure 1 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1), 9 for the small hit remaining ball process is set as the processing number (step Y1244). The process number is saved in the game process number area (step Y1245). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), and the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247). The hit processing ends.

  If the open pattern is 2 per small hit (special figure 2 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1243, 9 for the small hit remaining ball process is set as the process number (step Y1248). The process number is saved in the game process number area (step Y1249). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), and the off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251). The hit processing ends.

  If the open pattern is 3 or 4 per small hit in step Y1243 (special winning opening / closing pattern 6 or 7 in Special Figure 2), 9 is set as the processing number for the small hit remaining ball process (step Y1252). Then, the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1253). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (here, 800 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), and the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255). The hit processing ends.

  In steps Y1247, Y1251, and Y1255, off data is set for both the upper prize winning solenoid and the lower prize winning solenoid, and the process of closing any of the big winning prizes is performed.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
FIG. 86 shows the small hit remaining ball process (steps Y117 and Y148) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. In this small hit remaining sphere process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y1271). When the special figure 1 is a small hit (step Y1271; Y), 10 is set as the process number for the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y1272), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time (here, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

  If the special figure 1 is not a small hit (step Y1271; N), 10 is set as the process number for the special figure 2 small hit process (step Y1275), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time (100 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Furthermore, the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 87 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 is set as the process number for the special figure 1 normal process (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1304). Y1306). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y1307). If the probability is high (step Y1307; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1310. If the probability is not high (step Y1307; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1310).

  If the special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended (step Y1310; N), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1313), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms is used as the special figure 2 game wait time value. Is saved (2 in this case) (step Y1314), and the special figure 1 small hit end processing is terminated. If the special figure 2 variable display game is being interrupted (step Y1310; Y), a decoration special figure 2 restart command is prepared (step Y1311), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1312). Thereafter, the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1313), and a value corresponding to the special figure 2 game processing timer area 8 ms is saved as the special figure 2 game wait time value (step Y1314). The small hit end processing is terminated.

  As a result, the suspended special figure 2 variable display game is resumed with the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game. Also, by saving a value corresponding to the special figure 2 game process timer area 8 ms as the special figure 2 game wait time value, the start process for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process. The variable display game shown in FIG. 1 and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interruption.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 88 shows special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 is set as a process number for the special figure 2 ordinary process (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1335). Thereafter, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1336), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1337). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y1338). If the probability is high (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. If the probability is not high (step Y1338; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1340), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1341).

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is not suspended (step Y1341; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1344), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. If the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (step Y1341; Y), a decoration special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1342), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1343). Thereafter, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1344), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. As a result, the suspended special figure 2 variable display game is resumed with the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game.

  That is, the game control device 100 is controlled by one of the first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) and the second variation display game execution control means (game control device 100). When the execution control of the other variable display game is being performed, and the other variable display game whose execution control is being performed by the other variable display game execution control means has a special result, After the interruption and the special game state based on the other variable display game is ended, a restart control means capable of executing a restart control for restarting the one variable display game interrupted.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 89 shows the symbol variation control process (steps Y120 and Y153) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbol on the special symbol 1 display 51 or the special symbol 2 display 52. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2) is changing (Step Y1401).

  If the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1402; Y), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step Y1403), and the blinking control timer related to the control target symbol is acquired. -1 is updated (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step Y1405).

  If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), the process proceeds to step Y1408. If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer (here, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step Y1406), Is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value of the target fluctuation symbol number area is acquired (step Y1408). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), a symbol display table (for stoppage) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

[Segment LED editing processing]
FIG. 90 shows the segment LED editing process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this segment LED editing process, the storage display unit 54 provided in the collective display device 50, a round display for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of opening / closing of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39). Unit 60, first game state display unit 77 for notifying the player of the left strike (normal strike) and right strike, which is advantageous to the player, and the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the probability display unit 78 to be notified are made.

  In this segment LED editing process, first, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the storage display unit 54 is defined is set (step X601), and display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is obtained to obtain a segment. Save in the area (step X602). Next, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 is defined (step X603), display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X604).

  Then, the gaming state display table 1 in which the display mode in the probability display unit 78 is defined (step X605), display data corresponding to the gaming state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X606). After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 77 is defined is set (step X607), display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area ( Step X608), the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 91 shows the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and fraud notification is set to start or end.

  In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnet sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is turned on, that is, abnormal magnetism is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). Is detected (step X611). If the magnet sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 to determine whether the timer has expired. Determination is made (step X613).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step X613; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X614), and the magnet fraud monitoring timer initial value ( Here, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step X615). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step X616), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X617), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618), and the magnet fraud notification time is reached. If the magnet fraud notification timer that prescribes is not 0, -1 is updated (step X619). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620). Note that if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (step X613; N), the process proceeds to step X619.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired, and when the fraud notification period has ended, If not, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step X621). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step X623).

  When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), a production command setting process is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. To do.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 92 shows the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  In this panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the panel radio wave sensor 62 starts from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a. It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X631). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (here 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step X632).

  Then, a board radio fraud notification command is prepared (step X633), a board radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step X634), and the prepared board radio fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, -1 is updated unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is 0 ( Step X635). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step X636).

  If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step X636; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period has ended, If not, a command to terminate board radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step X637), a board radio wave fraud cancel flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X638), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is set to the board radio wave. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value of the illegal flag area (step X639).

  When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X639; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X640), an effect command setting process is performed (step X641), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring End the process.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 93 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the external information editing process, the monitoring result in the payout command transmission process (step X105), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114), etc. Based on the above, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set it in an output buffer is performed.

  In this external information editing process, it is first determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main body frame (front frame 12) is determined. It is determined whether an open error is occurring (step X702). If the body frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the door / frame opening signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the security signal OFF data is stored in the external information. The output data area is saved (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

  On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; Y), or when a body frame (front frame 12) opening error is occurring (step X702; Y), the door / frame opening signal is displayed. The on data is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X706), and the process proceeds to step X707. That is, information that the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are opened is output as external information.

  Next, if the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated to −1 (step X707). ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N), that is, if the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process goes to step X711. Transition. As a result, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information. If the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), whether or not fraudulent radio waves are occurring, which is the detection of abnormal radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12. Is determined (step X709).

  If the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. If no frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (step X711). If a switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X711; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X712), and the process proceeds to step X713.

  And, magnet fraud is occurring (step X713; Y), board radio wave fraud is occurring (step X714; Y), big prize opening fraud is occurring (step X715; Y), and special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step X716; Y). ), The security data on-data is saved in the external information output data area (step X718), and the gaming machine error status signal on-data is saved in the test signal output data area (step X718). X719), the process proceeds to step X720. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information. If none of the errors in steps X713 to X716 has occurred, the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and the process proceeds to step X720.

  Then, a start port 1 signal editing process for editing a winning signal to the first start winning port 36 (step X720) and a start port 2 signal editing process for editing a winning signal to the second start winning port 37 (step X721). Do. Next, a main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) for setting information relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a symbol determination number signal editing process for setting information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is performed. (Step X723), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Starter 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 94 shows the start port 1 signal editing process (step X720) in the external information editing process described above. In this starting port 1 signal editing process, first, if the starting port 1 signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. And it is determined whether the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the start port 1 signal output count is 0 (step X733).

  If the start port 1 signal output count is not 0 (step X733; N), the start port 1 signal output count is updated by -1 (step X734), and the start port 1 signal output is output to the start port 1 signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X735). The initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the start state (for example, high level) of the start port signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) of the off state (for example, low level). (For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. If the number of start port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738). ), The start port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N), it is determined whether the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736). Note that the fact that the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (eg, 64 ms). If the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736; Y), the process proceeds to step X737. When the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X736; N), the off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X738), the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. The start port 2 signal editing process (step X721) in the external information editing process described above is performed for the start port 2 signal in the same manner as the start port 1 signal editing process.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 95 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) in the external information editing process described above. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step X743).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step X743; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is output. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X745). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X747), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step X743; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S743). X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X746). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step X746; Y), the process proceeds to step X747. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X746; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Design determination frequency signal editing process]
FIG. 96 shows the symbol determination number signal editing process (step X723) in the external information editing process described above. The symbol determination number signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game.

  In this symbol determination frequency signal editing process, first, if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). When the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination number signal output count updated by +1 every time the special symbol variation display game is completed is 0. (Step X753).

  If the symbol determination number signal output count is not 0 (step X753; N), the symbol determination count signal output count is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main winning ball signal is output to the symbol determination count signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X755). The initial value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (256 ms in this case) of the symbol determination number signal (in this case, high level) and the time (in this case, 300 ms) in the off state (for example, low level). It is time (here 556 ms). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously, the on-state time is 256 ms and the off-state time is 300 ms.

  Thereafter, the on data for turning on the symbol determination number signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated. Further, when the symbol determination frequency signal output count is 0 (step X753; Y), off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S753). X758), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N), it is determined whether the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step X756). Note that the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms). If the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X756; Y), the process proceeds to step X757. Further, when the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X756; N), off data for turning off the symbol determination number signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

  Next, game effects will be described. FIG. 97 shows a display example on the display device 41. These display controls are controlled by the effect control device 300 based on the control information received from the game control device 100.

  FIG. 97A shows a display example on the display device 41 during a game in the normal gaming state. In the upper right part of the display area, a game mode display unit 80 for displaying a game state is provided. Here, a “normal stage” signifying a normal gaming state is displayed. In the center of the display area, a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 for displaying a decorative special figure 1 variable display game is provided. Here, the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is displayed by stopping and displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas. In the normal gaming state, since the special figure 1 variable display game is the main fluctuation, an effect display such as a reach effect for the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed largely in the center of the display area. An effect display for the special figure 2 variable display game is basically not displayed.

  In the lower right part of the display area, there is provided a decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Here, ◯ and-are used as identification information, and these are alternately displayed in the variable display, and after that, in the case of a special result, ◯ is displayed, and in the case of a loss,-is stopped and displayed. Display the game.

  At the lower center of the display area, a storage display unit 83 for displaying a decoration start storage display corresponding to the first start storage is provided. The decorative start memory display displayed here corresponds to the first start memory in a one-to-one correspondence and is displayed side by side in the storage order, and here, there are four first start memories. The decoration start memory display at the left end is a decoration start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left every time it is digested. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of pre-reading such as the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to each start memory by the display mode.

  An in-execution storage display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start-up memory corresponding to the currently executed special figure 1 variable display game is provided at the lower center of the display area and to the left of the storage display unit 83. In the in-execution memory display portion 84, the decoration start storage display at the left end of the memory display portion 83 is shifted at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed, the fluctuation pattern, etc. Is suggested by the display mode.

  FIG. 97 (b) shows a display example on the display device 41 during the game in the specific game state. In the upper left part of the display area, there is provided a game number information display unit 85 showing information on the number of games in a specific gaming state. “LAST” displays the number of remaining games that can be executed in a specific game state, and “TOTAL” displays the number of games executed in a series of specific game states.

  Although the numerical value on the display in the game number information display unit 85 does not necessarily match the actual number of games, the actual number of games is managed inside the production control device 300, and Based on this, the display contents on the game number information display unit 85 are set. The effect control device 300 manages the information on the number of remaining games by subtracting the number of remaining games in the specific game state every time the decoration special figure variation display game is executed, and the display content on the game number information display unit 85 is this information. Is set based on.

  On the right side of the game number information display section 85, a game mode display section 80 for displaying the game state is provided. Here, “pounding RUSH” indicating that the game state is normal is displayed. On the right side of the game mode display unit 80, a right-handed instruction display 86 for notifying that right-handed is advantageous for the player is made. On the right side of the right-handed instruction display 86, a memory display unit 83 and a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 are provided. Here, the first start memory number is indicated by a number. Further, the decoration special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 and the memory display unit 83 may not be displayed when the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed.

  Below the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display section 81, an acquired number display section 87 indicating the number of prize balls acquired in a series of specific game states is provided. In the number-of-acquisition display section 87, one prize ball is displayed as 1pt, which indicates that 1234 prize balls have been obtained. Further, in the center of the display area, the number of winning balls is displayed based on the winning to the special variable winning device, and is added to the acquired number display section 87.

  In the acquired number display section 87, the special game state based on the first special result generated in the low probability state from the start of the special game state to the start of the specific game state until the end of the series of specific game states. The number of prize balls won in the period from the start of the game to the fall in the low probability state by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times without the first special result being derived during the specific gaming state is displayed. During this period, it is added as needed every time a prize ball is acquired. The number of prize balls acquired in the special game state based on the first special result and the number of prize balls acquired in the special game state based on the second special result may be displayed separately, or only one of them is displayed. You may do it. Further, only the number of winning balls based on winning in the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 may be displayed, or the first start winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, The number of winning balls based on winning in the general winning opening 35 may also be displayed.

  In the lower right part of the display area, there is provided a decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game. The display position of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 is the same as the normal gaming state. In addition, at the lower center of the display area, a decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game display unit 88 for displaying the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game is provided. Here, the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is displayed by stopping and displaying the identification information in the left, middle, and right variable display areas. In the specific gaming state, since the special figure 2 variable display game is the main fluctuation, the effect display such as the reach effect for the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed largely in the center of the display area. An effect display for the special figure 1 variable display game is basically not displayed.

  In other words, the effect control device 300 constitutes a receiving means capable of receiving control information from the transmitting means (game control device 100), and based on the control information received by the receiving means, a decoration variation display game (decorative display) (1 variation display game and decoration special figure 2 variation display game) execution control means capable of performing execution control is made. In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration variation display game corresponding to the first variation display game (Special Figure 1 variation display game) or the second variation display game (Special Figure 2 variation display game) in the specific gaming state. Subtracting means for subtracting the number of times of execution of the variable display game from the predetermined number of times each time. Also, the effect control device 300 corresponds to the subtraction number of the subtracting means that the plurality of effect identification information is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in a specific gaming state without corresponding to the execution of the decoration variation display game. The display identification information fluctuation display means can be executed. Further, the effect control device 300 serves as a game number information notifying unit capable of notifying the game number information which is information corresponding to the subtraction result by the subtracting unit.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when one of the fluctuation displays is stopped while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are simultaneously executed, the other special figure fluctuation display is performed according to the stop result. The game execution state is controlled.

  FIG. 98 shows the control of the other special figure fluctuation display game when the result is derived for one special figure fluctuation display game. The control method 1 is a control in which when a special result is derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped by the result. In other words, the control is such that the condition device and the special electric accessory are stopped at a symbol that does not actuate and the display is continued as it is. The control method 2 is a control in which when a special result is derived in one special figure variation display game, the other special figure variation display game is interrupted and resumed after the special game state is ended. In other words, from the time when the combination of winning symbols is displayed to the time when the operation of the condition device or special electric accessory is terminated, the control for preventing the symbols from being stopped after interrupting the measurement of the predetermined fluctuation time. is there. “No control” is a control in which even if a result is derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, the other special figure fluctuation display game is continued without any influence.

  For example, when the first special result (big hit) is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped (control method 1). When the second special result (small hit) is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted and resumed after the special game state is ended (control method 2). In addition, when the shift result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is continued as it is (no control). If a special game state is being executed on the basis that one of the special figure fluctuation display games has a special result, the other special figure fluctuation display game is not newly started during the special game state. The other special figure variation display game can be started after the end of the special game state (it does not start even if there is a start memory).

  FIG. 99 shows an example in which one of the variable display is stopped in a state where the special map 1 variable display game and the special map 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed. As shown in the lower time chart, in this example, the special figure 1 variable display game that is a big hit is started during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game that is a small hit (t301), and the special figure 1 variable display game is started. And the special figure 2 variable display game are executed simultaneously.

  The fluctuation display end timing (t302) determined at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is earlier than the fluctuation display end timing (t304) decided at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. The one-variable display game is finished, and a jackpot result is derived (t302). Then, with the derivation of the big hit in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped by the result of losing, and the remaining fluctuation time scheduled is canceled (t302). -T304). After the end of the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, it becomes a stop time for displaying the result (t302 to t303), and when this stop time ends, the special game state based on the jackpot result derived in the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed. It is started (t303).

  The upper part of FIG. 99 shows the display on the display device 41 at the timings (a) to (g) shown in the time chart. Here, in the normal game state, a decoration special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 for displaying a special figure 1 variable display game is provided in the center of the display area, and at the timing of FIG. A reach state is reached in which the same identification information is stopped in the variable display area.

  Thereafter, the reach effect develops, and at the timing (b), the effect that the teammate character 91 and the enemy character 92 fight is started as the reach effect of the special figure 1 variable display game. Then, the production progresses as shown in (c) to (e), and it is shown that the teammate character 91 wins the big hit at the timing (f) immediately before the end of the variation time, and when the stop time comes (g) The result mode of the jackpot is displayed as follows. At this time, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with the result of the deviation, and in (g), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game display unit 82 for displaying the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game displays the deviation result. Is displayed.

  In this example, since the variation end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is earlier, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed without being affected by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. (A) to (g) The effects shown in FIG. 6 are performed as scheduled without being changed from the one determined at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. It should be noted that the special figure 2 variable display game also has a case where the special figure 2 variable display game results in a loss result or the special figure 2 variable display game does not derive a special result from the start to the end of the special figure 1 variable display game. Because it is not affected by the effect, the production proceeds in the same way.

  In addition, the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped in a time shorter than the planned fluctuation time and the result is changed to a result of losing, but since it is in a normal gaming state, the display device 41 has a decorative special figure. The two-variable display game display unit 82 only performs display using ◯ and-as identification information, and changes such as these do not cause any contradiction in production or the like. Therefore, when the operation is forcibly stopped by the result of the deviation, the result of the deviation is only displayed and stopped.

  FIG. 100 also shows an example of the case where one of the variable display stops while the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed. As shown in the lower time chart, in this example, the special figure 1 variable display game that is a big hit is started during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game that is a small hit (t311), and the special figure 1 variable display game is started. And the special figure 2 variable display game are executed simultaneously.

  The end timing (t313) of the variable display determined at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game is later than the end timing (t312) of the variable display determined at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. The variation time of the two-variable display game ends, and as a result, a small hit result is derived (t312). Then, with the derivation of the small hit in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted (t312).

  Thereafter, the special game state based on the small hit derived in the special figure 2 variable display game is entered, and the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted during this period (t312 to t314). When this special game state is finished, the suspended special figure 1 variable display game is resumed (t314). Then, it stops with the end of the fluctuation time and derives a big hit result (t315). The time from the restart to the stop (t314 to t315) is the same as the remaining time (t312 to t313) at the time of interruption. After the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is over, it becomes a stop time for displaying the result (t315 to t316), and when this stop time is over, the special game state based on the jackpot result derived in the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed. It is started (t316).

  In addition, after the special game state ends, a winning to the second start winning opening 37 occurs, and a new special figure 2 variable display game is started (t315). The special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being stopped by the big hit result, and the scheduled fluctuation time is cancelled.

  The upper part of FIG. 100 shows the display on the display device 41 at the timings (a) to (g) shown in the time chart. The progress of production from (a) to (f) is the same as in FIG. At the timing of (d), the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit and the small hit result is displayed on the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game display section 82 for displaying the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Also, at this time, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, but the performance proceeds regardless of the interruption. When the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted during the fluctuation, the variable display is continued until the restart, and the special figure 1 display 51 is in a state where the variable display is continued. In addition, since the decorative special figure 1 variation display game continues the variation state at the time of interruption, the variation display of the reach state is continued here, but it may be temporarily stopped (displayed so as to be shaken) in the form of the reach disengagement. good.

  Thereafter, it is indicated that the teammate character 91 wins and wins at the timing (f), but since the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the stop result is not displayed here, and the additional effect is started. . Further, in the states (e) and (f), the special game state based on the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is progressing, but the performance proceeds regardless of the progress of the special game state.

  The additional effects shown in (g) to (j) are effects with contents that are continuous with the effects up to (f). Here, there is an effect in which the lover character 93 of the winning ally character 91 appears. This additional effect is an effect of a length corresponding to the time when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, that is, the time of the special game state. Then, when the variable time of the resumed special figure 1 variable display game is ended and the stop time is reached, a stop result is displayed as shown in (k). If an effect that is not performed except when interruption occurs as an additional effect, the effect due to interruption can be made scarce and prevent the player from being dissatisfied with the occurrence of interruption. Can do.

  Here, in the special gaming state based on the small hits, the opening time of the special variable winning device is short, so the opportunity to close the special variable winning device is mostly due to the elapse of the openable time, and is specified in the special variable winning device. It is rare that the special variable winning device is closed when several (for example, ten) gaming balls win. Therefore, since the time (t312 to t314) from the start to the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit is always constant, the length of the additional effect prepared in advance may be the time of this special gaming state. Since the execution time of the special game state varies depending on the type of the small hit, an additional effect is prepared according to the type of the small hit, and the additional effect corresponding to the derived small hit is used.

  FIG. 101 shows another example of effects performed when the game shown in the time chart of FIG. 100 is executed. Note that timings t311 to t316 in the time chart are the same as those in FIG. In this effect, the teammate character 91 loses as shown in (e) from the timing (t320) a predetermined time before the timing of the end of the change (t313) scheduled at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. In other words, the production is replaced with an effect suggesting that the result is out of place.

  The effects in which the teammate character 91 and the enemy character 92 fight shown in FIG. 99 to FIG. 101 can be executed not only when the result is a big hit but also when the result is a big hit. Only the final stage production in the predetermined time is different. In the case of a big hit, the teammate character 91 wins the game, and in the case of a loss, the teammate character 91 is finally defeated. The timing (t320) before the predetermined time before the end of the change is the timing at which the effect branches between the effect in the case of the big hit and the effect in the case of the big hit. That is, what was started as an effect in the case of a big hit is replaced with an effect in the case of a loss.

  Thereafter, as an additional effect, an effect that the ally character 91 is restored as shown in (f) and (g), and an effect that the ally character 91 wins as shown in (h) and (i), The result mode is displayed as shown in (j). By doing in this way, the interest of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game interrupted by the occurrence of the small hit in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be enhanced.

  It should be noted that the timing for deriving the small hit result in the special figure 2 variable display game (t312) is later than the timing (t320) a predetermined time before the end of the fluctuation scheduled at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. In this case, since the effect that the ally character 91 has won has already been started, the replacement to the defeat effect is not performed, and for example, a separate additional effect as shown in FIG. 100 is executed. Make sure there are no contradictions in the production.

  Next, display on the display device 41 at the time of power failure recovery will be described. FIG. 102 shows an example of display on the display device 41 when power is restored. In this example, a power failure occurs in a state where the special figure variation display game is not being performed (t401), and then the power failure is recovered (t402). With the occurrence of a power failure, the game control device 100 performs a backup process and retains information at the time of the power failure even during a power failure. On the other hand, since the production control device 300 does not have a backup function, information when a power failure occurs is not retained.

  When the power is restored from the power failure, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 perform processing for activation. The game control apparatus 100 performs a power failure recovery process for returning to the state when the power failure occurred based on the information backed up when the power failure occurred. In addition, since the production control device 300 does not hold the information at the time of the power failure, the initialization is performed with the recovery from the power failure, and a display indicating that the power failure is being restored as shown in FIG. Do. This display during power failure recovery is basically displayed over a predetermined power failure recovery screen display scheduled period (t402 to t406) from the recovery of the power failure. That is, the end of the scheduled power failure recovery screen display period is one of the predetermined conditions for ending the display of the power failure recovery screen.

  In the power failure recovery process, a command for power failure recovery is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. The command at the time of power failure recovery includes a probability information command indicating whether or not a high probability state is present, whether or not the special figure variation display game is interrupted, and whether the special figure 1 or special figure 2 is interrupted. Commands are included. With these commands, the production control device 300 can recognize the probability state, the presence / absence of interruption, the type of special figure interrupted, and the like.

  In the example of FIG. 102, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the restoration of the power failure, the game control device 100 is in a state where the game can be executed. (T403). The main fluctuation that is one special figure fluctuation display game determined to be the main according to the gaming state and the irregular fluctuation that is the other special figure fluctuation display game are probability information received from the game control device 100 at the time of power failure recovery. Can be determined based on the command. When the information indicating the low probability state is received, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes the main fluctuation and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes the irregular fluctuation. When information indicating that the state is a high probability state is received, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes the main fluctuation, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game becomes the irregular fluctuation.

  When the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes irregular fluctuation is started in the scheduled blackout restoration display period, the special figure fluctuation display game is displayed with a part of the display indicating that the blackout restoration is in progress as shown in (b). Display the fluctuation of. Here, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that becomes irregular fluctuation has been started, and the display of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game display unit 82 that displays the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game is indicating that the power failure is being restored. It is displayed in part. After that, when the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes irregular fluctuation is completed (t404), the result of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is displayed with a part of the display indicating that the power failure is being restored as shown in (c). indicate.

  On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation display game that becomes the main fluctuation is started in the power failure recovery screen display scheduled period (t405), the display of the power failure recovery screen is ended as shown in (d) and the normal game is being played Is displayed. That is, the period for displaying the power failure recovery screen ends here. Therefore, even if the special figure variation display game that is the main variation ends within the scheduled power failure recovery screen display period, it does not return to the power failure recovery screen. Here, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game as the main fluctuation is started, and the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game display unit 81 for displaying the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is displayed in the center of the display area. That is, the start of the main fluctuation is one of the predetermined conditions for ending the display of the power failure recovery screen.

  When a special figure fluctuation display game is executed at the time of a power failure and this special figure fluctuation display game is resumed after the power failure is restored, the special figure fluctuation display game is the last lottery in the high probability state. In the case of the special figure fluctuation display game, the main fluctuation and the irregular fluctuation are interchanged when judged in the probability state. In the present embodiment, the main variation and the irregular variation are discriminated in a probability state without considering this, but the information that the game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery includes the high probability final variation flag. Information on the presence / absence of this may be transmitted so that main fluctuation and irregular fluctuation can be correctly discriminated.

  FIG. 103 shows an example of display on the display device 41 when power is restored. In this example as well, a power failure occurs in a state where the special figure variation display game is not performed (t411), and then the power failure is recovered (t412), and the power failure recovery as shown in FIG. Is displayed. Then, after the predetermined time has elapsed since the power failure recovery, and the game control device 100 is in a state where the game can be executed, the special figure 2 variable display game that becomes irregular in the power failure recovery screen display scheduled period is started (t413). In the display device 41, as shown in (b), the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game display section 82 displays the fluctuation display of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game displayed on a part of the display indicating that the power failure is being restored. Has been done.

  Thereafter, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that becomes irregular fluctuation is finished (t414), and the result of the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game is displayed with a part of the display indicating that the power failure is being restored as shown in (c). Is displayed. In this example, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a special result, and a fanfare command is transmitted from the game control device 100 after the stop time has elapsed (t415). In this case, the effect control device 300 ends the screen during restoration of the power failure, and displays a fanfare screen corresponding to the winning symbol as shown in (d) as in the normal game. In other words, if a special result is derived due to irregular fluctuations within the scheduled power failure recovery screen display period and the special gaming state is started, the period during which the power failure recovery screen is displayed is terminated and the normal game screen is displayed. I am doing so. That is, the start of the special gaming state satisfies one of the predetermined conditions for ending the display of the power failure recovery screen.

  FIG. 104 shows a display when a power failure occurs while one special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted based on a special result derived from the other special figure fluctuation display game, and then the power failure is restored. An example of display on the device 41 is shown. In this example, first, during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, a small hit result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and a special game state based on the small hit is started. (T421).

  Then, a power failure has occurred during the period in which the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and the special game state is being executed (t422). Thereafter, when the power is restored from the power failure (t423), the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 perform processing for activation. The game control apparatus 100 performs a power failure recovery process for returning to the state when the power failure occurred based on the information backed up when the power failure occurred. In addition, since the production control device 300 does not hold the information at the time of the power failure, the initialization is performed with the recovery from the power failure, and a display indicating that the power failure is being restored as shown in FIG. Do.

  When a predetermined time elapses from the restoration of the power failure and the game control apparatus 100 is in a state where the game can be executed, the game is resumed from the state at the time of the occurrence of the power failure. Thereby, the interruption of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special game state are resumed (t424). At this time, the production control device 300 continues the display indicating that the power failure is being restored as shown in (a). That is, even if the special gaming state is resumed, the display indicating that the power failure is being restored is continued. Thereby, the period which displays a power failure recovery screen is securable. In addition, you may make it alert | report that the special game state will be restarted by a part of display which shows that power failure recovery is in progress.

  Then, as the special gaming state ends, the suspended special figure 1 variable display game is resumed (t425). In addition, after the special game state is over, a winning to the second start winning opening 37 occurs and a new special figure 2 variable display game is started. At this time, with the resumption of the special figure 1 variable display game, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a decoration special figure 1 restart command to the effect control apparatus 300. In addition, a change command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 with the start of the special figure 2 change display game.

  In the effect control device 300, in response to the reception of these commands, the variable display of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is started. The decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a main fluctuation, but is resumed from the interruption, and as shown in (b), the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display displayed on a part of the display indicating that the power failure is being restored. The game display unit 81 performs display. That is, even if it is a main fluctuation, the period for displaying the power failure recovery screen is not terminated when resuming from interruption. Thereby, the period which displays a power failure recovery screen is securable. Further, since the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game is irregular fluctuation, as shown in (b), the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game display section 82 displayed on a part of the display indicating that the power failure is being restored. Display with.

  After that, the big win is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of losing (t426). The game control device 100 transmits a decoration special figure 1 stop command and a decoration special figure 2 stop command to the effect control device 300 at the end of the variation time, and the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. The decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game are stopped. Here, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of fluctuation, but the special figure 1 fluctuation display game has lost the information of the result received at the start of fluctuation due to a power failure. The result of the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped and displayed with symbols other than the identification information used in the decorative special figure fluctuation display game. Since the decorative special figure 2 variable display game was started after the power failure recovery, the result can be displayed.

  The decorative special figure 1 variable display game in this case is constituted by identification information used in the decorative special figure variable display game, in addition to being stopped at a symbol other than the identification information used in the decorative special figure variable display game. A predetermined default symbol may be stopped and displayed. The default symbol is a display (“241” or the like) indicating the result of the loss. Further, even if the result is a special result, a display with a default symbol indicating the result of losing is performed. When the result is a special result, the special game state effect is started after the display of the default symbol indicating the result of the loss.

  Here, since the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, a winning symbol command including fan symbol information and a fanfare command are transmitted to the effect control device 300 after the stop time has elapsed (t427). On the basis of this information, the production control device 300 ends the screen during the power failure recovery and displays a fanfare screen corresponding to the winning symbol as shown in (d). That is, the start of the special gaming state satisfies one of the predetermined conditions for ending the display of the power failure recovery screen.

  When the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of place, as shown in FIG. 102, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game as the main fluctuation is started, the irregular fluctuation as explained in FIG. When a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game as described above or when the power failure recovery screen display scheduled period elapses, the screen is returned to the normal game screen at the earlier timing.

  In the example of FIGS. 103 and 104, it is assumed that the screen returns to the normal game screen at the timing when the fanfare command is received. However, the screen at the time of the fanfare should be an image that is not related to the effect mode or the probability state so far. Therefore, there is an advantage that control is easy in the effect control device 300 that has lost information such as the effect mode. Of course, it does not have to be the timing at which the fanfare command is received. For example, when the stop command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is stopped when the variable display is stopped, information on the stop result is included. Alternatively, at the timing when the stop command is received, the normal game screen may be displayed to show the result of the special figure variation display game. When displaying the stop result, it is considered that information such as the rendering mode has been lost due to a power failure and the corresponding background image cannot be selected. Therefore, a predetermined background image is used as the background image.

  Also, at the time of power failure recovery (t423), as a command at the time of power failure recovery from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, there is an interruption command indicating whether there is an interruption or whether Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 is interrupted. In addition, a special figure 1 hold number command including information on the start memory number is also transmitted. Based on these commands, a running storage display unit 84 for displaying information related to the startup memory corresponding to the currently running special figure 1 variable display game, and a memory for displaying a decoration startup memory display corresponding to the first startup memory. If the display on the display unit 83 is displayed immediately after the power failure recovery screen is displayed, it is possible to maintain the execution of the suspended special figure fluctuation display game even after the power failure recovery. It is possible to make the player understand what is being done, and to prevent the player from having distrust. In addition to or instead of the display of the memory display unit, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the interrupted special figure fluctuation display game is displayed superimposed on the power failure recovery screen (the fluctuation display may be changed or shaken). It may be displayed as a temporary stop), or a message indicating that there is an interrupted special figure change display game may be displayed.

[Main processing]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main process shown in FIG. 105 and a timer interrupt process (not shown) are performed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 in order to perform the effects as described above. As shown in FIG. 105, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and an interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is read in the timer interruption process. In this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the effect contents is performed.

  Then, hall / player setting mode processing is performed for accepting operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update a random number that determines details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

  Next, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to a command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) for editing settings and control for drawing commands. ) To set the end of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the contents to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is a frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching). If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

  Thereafter, a sound control process (step C17) for performing control related to the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process (step C17) for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like. C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process for clearing WDT (step C8).

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 106 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, a command reception counter value that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

  Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and the command copy for the number of received commands is completed. Is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that the command copy for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). If it is determined that command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N), the process returns to step C207. If it is determined that the command analysis for the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 107 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  Further, when it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). The fluctuation system command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235; Y), the variable command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command for an operation related to a small hit effect (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. In the big hit command processing (step C238), the fanfare screen corresponding to the symbol is displayed based on the reception of the fanfare command. However, when the fanfare command is received while the power failure recovery screen is displayed. Then, the display of the power failure recovery screen is terminated, and the fanfare screen corresponding to the winning symbol is displayed.

  If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the design command range (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what is to be the stop symbol of the special symbol). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the symbol-related command (step C239; Y), symbol-related command processing (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as a pending number command and an error command. (Step C241). A single command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. This single-shot command includes a customer waiting demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model designation command, a decoration special figure 1 interruption command, a decoration special figure 2 interruption command, a decoration There are special figure 1 restart command, decorative special figure 2 restart command, and the like. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the single command (step C241; Y), the single command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not in the range of the single-shot command (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C243). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C243; Y), the pre-read symbol command processing (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetched symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the prefetched variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C245; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch fluctuation command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

  Note that the prefetch variation command and the prefetch symbol command are commands including information necessary for executing the prefetch effect. Pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the start memory (hold) for which the special figure fluctuation display game has not been executed is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of the change pattern (or what kind of variation pattern), the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a different manner from the normal display, or the display device 41 is rendered. This is an effect such as display. The prefetch command (prefetch variation command and prefetch symbol command) is a command for informing a change pattern and a stop symbol corresponding to the start memory to be prefetched in advance, and from the game control device 100 at the start winning prize It is transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that normal variation commands and symbol commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variation display.

[Single command processing]
FIG. 108 shows single-shot command processing in the received command analysis processing described above. In this single-shot command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information related to the model set in the game control apparatus 100 (step C261). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to a model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing for rewriting internal information with model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and single command processing is performed. Exit.

  If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), whether or not the MODE corresponds to a RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. Determination is made (step C263). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization process is performed (step C264), and the one-shot command process is terminated. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), an area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and RAM initialization screen information is set. Furthermore, scenario data for RAM initialization is set in order to produce an effect when RAM initialization is performed.

  If it is determined in step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), MODE returns a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C has been recovered from the power failure without initialization. It is determined whether it corresponds (step C265). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), the power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area that needs to be initialized is initialized, and recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to produce an effect upon power failure recovery.

  If it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). If it is determined that MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y), the customer waiting demo processing is performed (step C268), and the single-shot command processing is terminated. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the state of the P machine (pachinko machine) is set to the customer waiting demonstration, and the customer waiting scenario data is set to perform the customer waiting effect.

  If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is in FIG. 1 suspension (step C269). If the MODE is on the special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y), a special figure 1 hold information setting process is performed to display a decoration start storage display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41. (Step C270), the single command processing is terminated. That is, the production control device 300 serves as a start memory display means for performing a start memory notification display for displaying information related to the start memory by a start memory display (decoration start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the start memory for suspending the execution of the special figure variable display game can be generated only for the special figure 1 variable display game, but the special figure similarly applies to the special figure 2 variable display game. In the case of generating the start memory for holding the execution of the variable display game, the special figure 2 for performing processing for displaying the decoration start memory display corresponding to the generated special figure 2 hold (second start memory) on the display device 41, etc. Hold information setting processing is performed.

  In step C269, if the MODE is not the special figure 1 suspension (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is probability information (step C271). If MODE is probability information (step C271; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C272), and the one-shot command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE is not probability information in Step C271 (Step C271; N), it is determined whether the MODE is error / invalid (Step C273). If the MODE is error / illegal (step C273; Y), an error / illegal setting process for performing a corresponding process such as error notification is performed (step C274), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  If the MODE is not an error / incorrect at step C273 (step C273; N), it is determined whether the MODE is effect mode switching (step C275). If MODE is effect mode switching (step C275; Y), effect mode switching processing for performing effect mode switching processing is performed (step C276), and the single command processing is terminated.

  If the MODE is not effect mode switching in Step C275 (Step C275; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a symbol stop (Step C277). If MODE is symbol stop (step C277; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C278). In determining whether the command is normal, it is determined, for example, whether the target of the decoration special figure stop command is a special figure that is currently changing.

  If the command is not normal (step C278; N), the single command processing is terminated. If the command is normal (step C278; Y), the corresponding special figure is set to stop (step C279). If all symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C280). The single command processing is terminated. Thereby, the change display of the corresponding decorative special figure change display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state. In addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

  In step C277, if the MODE is not a symbol stop (step C277; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a change interruption (step C281). If MODE is a change interruption (step C281; Y), a change interruption setting process for interrupting the decoration special figure change display game and setting an effect is performed (step C282), and the one-shot command process is terminated. .

  If the MODE is not a change interruption in Step C281 (Step C281; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a change restart (Step C283). If MODE is a change restart (step C283; Y), a change restart setting process for restarting the decoration special figure change display game and setting an effect is performed (step C284), and the one-shot command process is terminated. . In step C283, when the MODE is not to resume the fluctuation (step C283; N), the single command processing is terminated.

[Change interruption setting processing]
FIG. 109 shows the change interruption setting process in the single-shot command process described above. In this variation interruption setting process, first, it is determined whether the command is normal (step C301). If the command is not normal (step C301; N), the variation interruption setting process is terminated. If it is a normal command (step C301; Y), it is determined whether the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) targeted by the decorative special figure interruption command is changing (step C302).

  If the target symbol is not changing (step C302; N), the change interruption setting process ends. If the target symbol is changing (step C302; Y), it is determined whether the received command is a decorative special figure 1 interruption command (step C303), and the received command is a decorative special figure 1 interruption command. (Step C303; Y), the interruption variation display of the decorative special figure 1 is set (step C304). In the setting of the variable display for interruption of the decorative special figure 1, for example, if the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 for displaying the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is displayed in the center of the display area, the corner of the display area is displayed. Process to move to. In addition, a process for setting the contents of the variable display performed at the time of interruption (may be a variable display or a temporary stop that is displayed so as to be shaken) is performed.

  Then, the suspension flag of the decorative special figure 1 is set (step C305), and it is determined whether the probability is low (step C306). When the probability is not low (step C306; N), that is, when the probability is high, the variation interruption setting process is terminated. In this case, since the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is irregular fluctuation, the effect for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not originally performed, and there is no need to change the production due to interruption.

  When the probability is low (step C306; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 side is a big hit (step C307). If the special figure 2 side is a big hit (step C307; Y), the change interruption setting process is terminated. When the probability is low, since the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is the main fluctuation, the effect for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed, but the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit In order to preferentially execute the effect in the special game state based on the jackpot, the effect related to the special figure 1 variable display game due to the interruption is not changed. In this case, the production is resumed from the point of interruption when the special figure 1 variable display game is resumed.

  If the special figure 2 side is not a big hit (step C307; N), that is, if it is a small hit, it is determined whether the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of place (step C308). When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of play (step C308; Y), the changing effect is changed to the extended effect 1 for interruption (step C316), and the change interruption setting process is terminated.

  If the special figure 1 variation display game is not out of place (step C308; N), it is determined whether there is a variation remaining time in which the effect can be replaced (step C314). If there is no change remaining time that can be changed (step C314; N), the process proceeds to step C316. If there is a remaining fluctuation time that can be changed (step C314; Y), the changing effect is changed to the extended effect 2 for interruption (step C315), and the change interruption setting process is terminated.

  The interruption extension effect 1 set in step C316 is to perform an additional effect after all the effects that were initially planned are executed as shown in FIG. When the result is a big hit, the contents shown in FIGS. 100 (a) to 100 (k) are produced. Of course, an appropriate additional effect is selected according to the type of reach effect. Further, when the result is out of order, the contents of (g) to (k) are the contents of the production in accordance with the contents of the production of the loss that the teammate character 91 is defeated. In the case of a variation pattern that is out of reach and does not perform reach production, the variation display of the decorative special figure 1 variation display game is continued as an additional production or the identification information is shaken temporarily.

  The extension effect 2 for interruption set in step C315 replaces the original jackpot effect as shown in FIG. 101 with an off-stage effect and performs an effect indicating that it is a big hit as an additional effect. is there. Therefore, the case where there is a change remaining time that can be replaced in step C314 means that the stage is before the stage where the stage branches off in the case of the big hit and the stage in the case of the offense. It is before t320. If it is later than this timing, the result has already been produced on the production, and since there is no point in replacing it, the extension production 1 for interruption is set. Note that the remaining change time that can be changed in the effect in step C314 is determined according to the content of the effect that is being executed, and therefore the remaining change time that can be changed is different depending on the effect that is being executed.

  On the other hand, when the received command is not the decorative special figure 1 interruption command (step C303; N), the variable display for interruption of the decorative special figure 2 is set (step C309). In the setting of the variable display for interruption of the decorative special figure 2, for example, if the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 for displaying the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is displayed at the center of the display area, the corner of the display area is displayed. Process to move to. In addition, a process for setting the contents of the variable display performed at the time of interruption (may be a variable display or a temporary stop that is displayed so as to be shaken) is performed.

  Then, the suspension flag in the decorative special figure 2 is set (step C310), and it is determined whether or not the probability is low (step C311). When the probability is low (step C311; Y), the variation interruption setting process is terminated. In this case, since the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is irregular fluctuation, the production for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not originally performed, and there is no need to change the production due to interruption.

  If the probability is not low (step C311; N), that is, if the probability is high, it is determined whether the special figure 1 side is a big hit (step C312). If the special figure 1 side is a big hit (step C312; Y), the variation interruption setting process is terminated. When the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of the loss, so it is not usually determined that the special figure 1 side is a big hit in this process. The determination is made because the command may be transmitted for some reason. As a result, when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, an effect in a special game state based on the big hit is always executed with priority.

  If the special figure 1 side is not a big hit (step C312; N), that is, if it is a small hit, it is determined whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of place (step C313). When the special figure 2 variable display game is out of play (step C313; Y), the changing effect is changed to the extended effect 1 for interruption (step C316), and the variable interruption setting process ends.

  If the probability is high, the special figure 2 variable display game will not be lost except when it is forcibly stopped, but if the result is out of play, an effect as shown in FIG. 100 is performed. The contents of (g) to (k) are added to the contents of the effects as the effects of the losing effects of the teammate character 91 defeating. In the case of a variation pattern that is out of reach and does not perform the reach effect, the variation display of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is continued as an additional effect, or the identification information is shaken temporarily.

  If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not out of place (step C313; N), it is determined whether there is a fluctuation remaining time that can be replaced with an effect (step C314). If there is no change remaining time that can be changed (step C314; N), the process proceeds to step C316. If there is a remaining fluctuation time that can be changed (step C314; Y), the changing effect is changed to the extended effect 2 for interruption (step C315), and the change interruption setting process is terminated. The extension effects 1 and 2 for interruption set when the result is not out of place are the same as those in the special figure 1 variable display game.

  As described above, by setting the suspension extension effect 1 or the suspension extension effect 2 for the interrupted special figure variation display game to be interrupted, the decorative special figure variation display game that has been interrupted while being interrupted is set. The production will continue. Here, it is assumed that the production varies depending on whether or not there is a change remaining time that can be changed, but regardless of whether or not there is a change remaining time that can be changed, as shown in FIG. You may make it perform an additional production after performing the production which was scheduled.

[Variation restart setting processing]
FIG. 110 shows the change restart setting process in the single-shot command process described above. In this variation restart setting process, first, it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C331). If not a normal command (step C331; N), the variation restart setting process is terminated. If it is a normal command (step C331; Y), it is determined whether it is a decoration special figure 1 restart command (step C332).

  If it is a special decoration figure 1 restart command (step C332; Y), it is determined whether the special decoration figure 1 is suspended (step C333), and if it is not suspended (step C333; N), a change restart setting is made. The process ends. If it is suspended (step C333; Y), the suspended flag in the decorative figure 1 is cleared (step C334), and it is determined whether the power failure recovery display is being performed (step C335).

  When the power failure recovery display is being performed (step C335; Y), the variation restart of the decorative special figure 1 with the reduced symbol is set (step C336), and the variation restart setting process is terminated. In this case, regardless of whether the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is the main fluctuation or irregular fluctuation, the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is displayed on a part of the power failure recovery screen as shown in FIG. Make it run.

  Moreover, when the power failure recovery display is not being performed (step C335; N), the variation restart of the decorative special figure 1 corresponding to the probability state and the effect is set (step C337), and the variation restart setting process is terminated. Since an interruption may occur due to the occurrence of a big hit, the probability state at the time of interruption may be different from the probability state at the time of restart. For this reason, the display state of the decorative special figure variation display game is set with reference to the probability state at the time of restart. In addition, when the reach effect is resumed at the time of resumption, the display state of the decorative special figure variation display game is set with reference to the effect at the time of resumption in order to obtain a display corresponding to this.

  Specifically, when the probability state is a low probability state at the time of restart, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game display unit 81 is basically displayed at the center of the display area because the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is the main fluctuation. To do. However, when the reach effect is resumed at the time of resumption and the decoration special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 is not displayed at the center of the display area, the display is displayed at the corner of the display area. When the probability state is a high probability state at the time of restart, the special figure 1 variable display game becomes irregular fluctuation, so that the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 is displayed at the corner of the display area. .

  On the other hand, if it is not the decoration special figure 1 restart command (step C332; N), it is determined whether the decoration special figure 2 is suspended (step C338), and if it is not suspended (step C338; N), the fluctuation is resumed. The setting process ends. If it is suspended (step C338; Y), the suspended flag in the decorative figure 2 is cleared (step C339), and it is determined whether the power failure recovery display is being performed (step C340).

  When the power failure recovery display is being performed (step C340; Y), the variation restart of the decoration special figure 2 with the reduced symbol is set (step C341), and the variation restart setting process is ended. In this case, regardless of whether the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the main fluctuation or irregular fluctuation, the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game is displayed on a part of the power failure recovery screen as shown in FIG. Make it run.

  Moreover, when the power failure recovery display is not being performed (step C340; N), the variation resumption of the decorative special figure 2 corresponding to the probability state and the effect is set (step C342), and the variation resumption setting process is terminated. In this embodiment, since the position of the decoration special figure 2 variable display game display unit 82 does not change depending on the probability state or effect, this processing may not be performed. Is changed, the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed at an appropriate display position by this process.

[Design command processing]
FIG. 111 shows the symbol command processing (step C240) in the above-described received command analysis processing. In this symbol system command processing, first, a special symbol type corresponding to MODE (either special graph 1 or special graph 2) is set (step C351), and a symbol type corresponding to a combination of MODE and ACT is set. Save (step C352), and the symbol-type command processing ends.

  The symbol type is a category of symbols such as outlier symbol, 16R probability variation big hit symbol, 8R probability variation big hit symbol, 4R probability variation big hit symbol, 2R probability variation big hit symbol, small hit symbol, etc., and is associated with ACT data. Since the ratio of symbols varies between Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 (the probability variation ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and it corresponds to MODE data from a plurality of symbol type setting tables. And the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set with reference to the table.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 112 shows the variable command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this variable command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is unconfirmed (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-described symbol system command processing.

  If this special figure type is unconfirmed (step C361; Y), the variable command processing is terminated. When the special figure type is not yet determined (step C361; N), that is, when the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variation command and the symbol type are determined. It is determined whether they are inconsistent (step C363).

  When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (step C363; Y), the variation command processing is terminated. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols. Examples of the symbol type include an outlier symbol, a 16R probability variable big hit symbol, an 8R probability variable big hit symbol, a 4R probability variable big hit symbol, a 2R probability variable big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, and the like. In the case where the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, an effect such as when the symbol command of the 16R probability variation big hit symbol is received although the deviation variation command (variation pattern command) is received. This means that the combination is inconsistent (a combination of a variation command and a symbol type).

  In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, variation effect setting processing for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

  Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (pachinko machine state) (step C366). Here, during the special map change, the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, during a big hit or during a fanfare, etc.). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by −1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable command process is terminated.

[Variation production setting processing]
FIG. 113 shows the changing effect setting process (step C365) in the above-described changing command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (step C381). If the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code and special figure type and the presenting mode is set (step C382). In addition, since it is a fluctuation without reach, the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, and there is no need to particularly refer to the symbol type here. The production mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the production control device 300 and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability change mode, a time reduction mode, a latent mode, and the like. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 are different are provided.

  Next, referring to the first-half notice allocation group address table, the address of the first-order notice allocation group table corresponding to the number of MODE and special figure types is acquired (step C383). As a result, in the case of fluctuation without reach, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the notice effects that appear during each change (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) according to the number of holds. Thereafter, a lottery for a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation is performed using the first half notice allocation group table (step C386).

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, presentation mode and symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first half notice allocation group address table, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first half notice distribution group table is used to change the first half. The lottery for the advance notice appearing is performed (step C386).

  Next, the notice effect of the second half change is drawn. Note that the latter half of the special figure fluctuation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, a special result mode (a special combination of symbols) in which a display area excluding a specific area out of a plurality of display areas of the special figure is a big hit) Is a variable display in a state in which the variable is displayed only in a specific area. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is a fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

  First, a second half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, effect mode, and symbol type is set (step C387). The second half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the second half notice distribution group table. Then, the second half notice allocation group table address corresponding to the ACT is obtained by referring to the second half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second half notice distribution group table is used to change the second half (during reach). A lottery for notice of appearance is performed (step C389).

  Thereafter, the contents of the variable effects corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C390), and the contents of the effects corresponding to the notice lottery result are determined (step C391). As a result, the presentation and notice such as the variation time and main reach contents of the decoration special figure variation display game are determined. Further, the stop symbol is determined with reference to the determined variation pattern (reach effect etc.) of the special symbol variation display game and the notice content (step C392).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the power failure recovery display in the state where the power failure recovery screen is displayed (step C393). If the power failure recovery display is not being performed (step C393; N), the display setting of the fluctuation effect is performed (step S393). C395), the display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C396). With these processes, it is possible to execute effects and notices in the decorative special figure variation display game set as described above.

  Thereafter, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed (step C397). In this embodiment, the start memory for holding off the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game is generated only in the first start memory corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Therefore, in this process, only when the special figure fluctuation display game is started. A setting is made to decrease the decoration start memory display corresponding to the decrease of the first start memory. In the case of generating the start memory for deferring the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is also similarly executed.

  Then, a voice number that is a BGM number and a decoration number that is a number indicating the type of effect produced by a decoration lamp or the like are set (step C398), and a decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display setting is performed (step C399). Further, in the display device 41 or a separate display device, the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol type is set in order to set the variation symbol of the fourth symbol for displaying the decoration special symbol variation display game separately from the variation display of the identification information. Change display setting is performed (step C400), and the change effect setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the power failure recovery display is being performed (step C393; Y), it is determined whether or not the current variation is a symbol that is the main display (step C394). That is, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation display game that starts the fluctuation display this time is the main fluctuation. In this determination, the determination is performed based on the current probability state.

  If the current variation is a symbol that is a main display (step C394; Y), that is, if it is a main variation, the process proceeds to step C395. In this case, as shown in FIG. 102 (d), the display of the power failure recovery screen is ended, and the same effect display as in the normal game is performed.

  If the current variation is not the main display symbol (step C394; N), that is, if it is irregular variation, the process proceeds to step C399. In this case, only the variation display of the identification information and the variation display of the fourth symbol are set, and the variation effect, the notice effect, etc. are not set. That is, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), only the variable display is performed on a part of the power failure recovery screen.

  In the above description, when the production control device 300 receives the decoration special figure 1 interruption command or the decoration special figure 2 interruption command, the decoration special figure variation display game is interrupted, and the decoration special figure 1 restart command or decoration special figure is displayed. 2 The special figure variation display game is resumed when a restart command is received. However, if the effect control device 300 grasps the interruption or the resume even if these commands are not received, the special figure variation is displayed. The display game may be interrupted or resumed. For example, when a command transmitted when a special result is derived even if the special decoration figure 1 interruption command or the special decoration figure 2 interruption command is not received, the other special figure change display game is displayed. If the game is being executed, the decoration special figure variation display game may be interrupted. Further, the effect control device 300 may perform control to resume based on the end of the special gaming state even if the decoration special figure 1 restart command or the decoration special figure 2 restart command is not received.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 99 and the like, when the big win is derived in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the running special figure 2 fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped by the result of losing. The jackpot that the player was supposed to win will disappear. In such a case, the ending time in the special game state based on the big win of the special figure 1 variable display game is extended, and the operation of the special variable winning device corresponding to the small win that the player should have acquired at the ending time. May be performed.

  In addition, if the production is performed as a main fluctuation before the interruption, and the probability state changes during the interruption and becomes an irregular fluctuation at the time of restart, it is executed before the interruption even if it is an irregular fluctuation. The rendition may be continued even after resumption.

  In addition, in FIG. 113, when the power failure recovery display is being performed (step C393; Y), the power failure recovery display is terminated according to the detailed distribution conditions shown in the following (a) to (d), and the decorative special map changes. You may make it determine whether to perform a display game. In addition, the special figure fluctuation display game to be resumed performs only the fluctuation display on a part of the power failure recovery screen.

  (A) There is a suspended special figure fluctuation display game, and the suspended special figure fluctuation display game is a main fluctuation at the time of resumption, and the special figure fluctuation display game to be resumed. If the result of is a special result. (A1) When the irregular fluctuation to be newly started is out of place, only the fluctuation display is performed on a part of the power failure recovery screen for the irregular fluctuation. (A2) When the irregular fluctuation to be newly started is a special result and the irregular fluctuation ends before the main fluctuation, the display of the power failure recovery screen for the irregular fluctuation is terminated and the normal fluctuation is terminated. The same effect display as in the game is performed. (A3) When the irregular fluctuation to be newly started is a special result and the irregular fluctuation ends after the main fluctuation, only the fluctuation display is performed on a part of the power failure recovery screen for the irregular fluctuation. .

  (B) When there is a suspended special figure fluctuation display game, and the suspended special figure fluctuation display game is a main fluctuation at the time of resumption, the special figure fluctuation display game to be resumed If the result of is out of sync. (B1) When the irregular fluctuation to be newly started is out of place, only the fluctuation display is performed on a part of the power failure recovery screen for the irregular fluctuation. (B2) When the irregular fluctuation to be newly started is a special result, the display of the power failure recovery screen is terminated for the irregular fluctuation, and the same effect display as in the normal game is performed.

  (C) There is a suspended special figure fluctuation display game, and the suspended special figure fluctuation display game is irregular fluctuation at the time of resumption, and the special figure fluctuation display to be resumed. When the game results are special. (C1) When the newly started main variation ends before the irregular variation, the display of the power failure recovery screen is terminated for the main variation, and the same effect display as during normal game is performed. (C2) When the newly started main fluctuation ends after the irregular fluctuation, only the fluctuation display is performed on a part of the power failure recovery screen for the main fluctuation.

  (D) When there is a suspended special figure fluctuation display game, and the suspended special figure fluctuation display game becomes irregular fluctuation at the time of resumption, the special figure fluctuation display to be resumed When the result of the game is out of place, the display of the power failure recovery screen is terminated for the newly started main fluctuation, and the same effect display as in the normal game is performed.

  By doing this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the special figure fluctuation display game displayed after the display of the power failure recovery screen is finished does not match the special figure fluctuation display game from which the special result is derived. it can.

  From the above, the result of the variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of the game ball at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37) is a special result. In this case, a game that can generate a special game state that can give a player a game value by converting the variable winning device (the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39) from the closed state to the open state. In the machine, the start winning opening includes a first starting winning opening 36 and a second starting winning opening 37 disposed at a position different from the first starting winning opening 36. The first variation display means (special figure 1 display 51, display device 41) capable of displaying the first variation display game based on the winning of the game ball and the second based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37 Second variation display means capable of displaying a two variation display game (special figure 2 display) 52, based on the winning of the game ball in the display device 41) and the first start winning opening 36, the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information may be determined at the start of the first variation display game. First determining means (game control device 100) that can be, and first variation display game execution control means (game control) capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game based on the determination result of the first determining means Device 100) and the second variation display game result and variation mode information can be determined at the start of the second variation display game based on the winning of the game ball in the second start winning opening 37. 2 determination means (game control apparatus 100) and second variation display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game based on the determination result of the second determination means. And in the game Production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the output, and one of the variation display game execution control means and the first variation display game execution control means of one variation display game. When execution control is being performed, if the other variation display game whose execution control is being performed by the other variation display game execution control means has a special result, one variation display game is interrupted and the other variation display game is interrupted. Resumption control means (game control device 100) capable of executing resumption control for resuming one of the fluctuation display games suspended after the special game state based on the fluctuation display game is ended, When the resumption control is performed, if an effect corresponding to one of the variable display games to be interrupted is executed before the interruption, the one It is possible to continuously perform effects corresponding to the variable display game.

  Therefore, there is no contradiction in production, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring even when simultaneous variation is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means is added as an effect corresponding to one of the variable display games to be interrupted based on the fact that the restart control by the restart control means is determined to be performed. The production is set.

  Therefore, there is no contradiction in production, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring even when simultaneous variation is performed.

  Further, the effect control means suggests that the effect corresponding to the one variable display game is not a special result when the result of the one variable display game to be interrupted is a special result. In addition to replacing the effect, an effect indicating that a special result is obtained as an additional effect is set.

  Therefore, there is no contradiction in production, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring even when simultaneous variation is performed.

  In addition, when the result of the variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37) becomes a special result, In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state capable of giving a player a gaming value by converting the variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) from a closed state to an open state, The start winning opening includes a first starting winning opening 36 and a second starting winning opening 37 disposed at a position different from the first starting winning opening 36, and a game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 is provided. First variation display means (special figure 1 display 51, display device 41) capable of displaying the first variation display game based on the winning of the game, and the second variation display based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37 Second variation display means capable of displaying a game (Special Figure 2 Display 52, Table Device 41) and the first variation display game result and variation mode information can be determined at the start of the first variation display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36. 1 determination means (game control apparatus 100) and first variation display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game based on the determination result of the first determination means And a second determination that can determine the result of the second variation display game and the variation mode information at the start of the second variation display game based on the winning of the game ball in the second start winning opening 37. Means (game control apparatus 100), second variation display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game based on the determination result of the second determination means, First variation display game When one of the variation display game execution control means performs execution control of one of the variation display game execution control means, the other variation display game execution control means executes the execution control. If the other variation display game on which the other game is being played has a special result, one variation display game is interrupted and one variation that was interrupted after the special game state based on the other variation display game ends Resumption control means (game control device 100) capable of executing resumption control for resuming a display game, and information relating to a game can be stored and retained even if a power failure occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. A table that displays game information storage means (game control device 100) that allows the game to be resumed based on the information stored and retained after the restoration, and an effect display relating to the game Display device 41 and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling display on display device 41. The effect control means displays a power failure recovery screen on display device 41 until a predetermined condition is satisfied after power failure recovery. If one of the variable display games is interrupted by the restart control means when a power failure occurs, the one variable display game is restarted after the power failure is restored, and a special result is derived. When the game is started, the display during normal game is restored from the start of the special game state.

  Therefore, in the case of a game machine that performs simultaneous variation, when one of the variation display games is interrupted and restart control is resumed to resume one of the variation display games after the special gaming state based on the other variation display game is terminated In addition, it is possible to secure a period during which the power failure recovery screen is displayed, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed.

  In addition, when the result of the variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37) becomes a special result, In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state capable of giving a player a gaming value by converting the variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) from a closed state to an open state, The start winning opening includes a first starting winning opening 36 and a second starting winning opening 37 disposed at a position different from the first starting winning opening 36, and a game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 is provided. First variation display means (special figure 1 display 51, display device 41) capable of displaying the first variation display game based on the winning of the game, and the second variation display based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37 Second variation display means capable of displaying a game (Special Figure 2 Display 52, Table Device 41) and the first variation display game result and variation mode information can be determined at the start of the first variation display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36. 1 determination means (game control apparatus 100) and first variation display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game based on the determination result of the first determination means And a second determination that can determine the result of the second variation display game and the variation mode information at the start of the second variation display game based on the winning of the game ball in the second start winning opening 37. Means (game control apparatus 100), second variation display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game based on the determination result of the second determination means, First variation display game When one of the variation display game execution control means performs execution control of one of the variation display game execution control means, the other variation display game execution control means executes the execution control. If the other variation display game on which the other game is being played has a special result, one variation display game is interrupted and one variation that was interrupted after the special game state based on the other variation display game ends Resumption control means (game control device 100) capable of executing resumption control for resuming a display game, and information relating to a game can be stored and retained even if a power failure occurs and power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. A table that displays game information storage means (game control device 100) that allows the game to be resumed based on the information stored and retained after the restoration, and an effect display relating to the game A display device 41, and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling display on the display device 41. The effect control means displays a power failure recovery screen on the display device until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power failure is recovered. If one of the variable display games is interrupted by the restart control means when a power failure occurs and the result is derived after the one variable display game is restarted after the power failure is restored, From the derivation of the result, the display is returned to the normal game display.

  Therefore, in the case of a game machine that performs simultaneous variation, when one of the variation display games is interrupted and restart control is resumed to resume one of the variation display games after the special gaming state based on the other variation display game is terminated In addition, it is possible to secure a period during which the power failure recovery screen is displayed, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed.

  In the above description, the variation display game is executed based on the fact that the variation display game is executed as a variation display game, and a result is obtained after a predetermined variation time based on the establishment of the start condition. Although a so-called one type of variable display game that generates a gaming state has been described, other variable display games may be used. For example, a game ball that has flowed into a winning device that is released based on the result of the variation display game being executed after a predetermined variation time based on the establishment of the start condition is executed and the result of the variation display game becomes a specific result. It may be a so-called two-type variable display game that generates a special gaming state based on winning a specific area in the winning device.

  Further, as in the above-described gaming machine, two independent types of variable display games may be played as the special map variable display game, or one type may be one type and the other type may be two types. Both may be of two types. Also, one type or two types of variable display game may be played as the special figure variable display game.

  Further, for the special figure 2 variable display game, the second start memory for deferring the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated. However, as in the special figure 1 variable display game, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, The second start memory may be generated until 4). In addition, the normally variable prize-winning device capable of changing the state between the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win or cannot win, and the open state in which the game ball can be easily won or won in the second start winning opening 37. You may make it provide. Then, in the specific game state in which the game is progressed mainly by the special figure 2 variable display game, it may be controlled so that the opening time of the normal variable winning device per unit time is substantially longer than that in the normal game state. .

  Further, the predetermined condition for terminating the display of the power failure recovery screen is the end of the scheduled power failure recovery screen display period, the start of the special game state, or the start of the main variation, but other conditions may be used, and the production control device It can be conditional on some information being entered into 300. For example, it may be the start of a special figure variation display game that becomes irregular variation, or the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Further, information may be transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the winning from the game control device 100 to the game ball winning opening or the operation of the operation unit 24, and based on this, the display of the power failure recovery screen may be terminated.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification differs in the effect performed at the time of interruption.

  FIG. 114 shows an example of effects performed when the game shown in the time chart of FIG. 100 is executed in the gaming machine of this modification. Note that timings t311 to t316 in the time chart are the same as those in FIG. In this effect, at the timing (t312) for deriving the small hit result in the special figure 2 variable display game where the special figure 1 variable display game will be interrupted, as shown in (d) and (e) The production that was done is also interrupted. The interrupted effect is displayed as a light display in a suspended state (freeze display), and a separate additional effect is performed in front of the interrupted effect (display of a superimposed image). Here, the effect that the teammate character 91 and the enemy character 92 fight is interrupted, and a separate additional effect by the lover character 93 is performed. The additional additional effects are effects related to the interrupted effects, but may be effects that are not related.

  In this example, a timer accessory 95 capable of displaying time is provided. The timer accessory 95 is arranged in front of the display device 41 so as to display the remaining time until the occurrence timing of the specific event in the production. For example, in FIG. 50 seconds is displayed as the time until the change end timing (t313). When the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the timer function 95 is also stopped, and in the states (d) and (e), the remaining 30 seconds are stopped. It has become a state.

  After that, when the special game state is ended and the special figure 1 variable display game is resumed (t314), as shown in (f) to (h), the additional additional effects are ended and the effects and timers interrupted. Time measurement with the accessory 95 is resumed, and the result mode is displayed as shown in (i).

  As shown in FIG. 115, the timing for deriving the small hit result (t312) in the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately before the fluctuation end timing (t313) scheduled at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. In this case, there is almost no execution time for the production after the restart. In this case, since the effect which has been interrupted slightly after the additional effect being interrupted is executed and the result mode is displayed, there is a possibility that the effect may be uncomfortable.

  For this reason, when the special game state is ended and the special figure 1 variable display game is restarted (t314), as shown in (c) to (e), the accessory 96 is overlapped in front of the display device 41. By making it operate, the player's consciousness is directed to the accessory 96 so as not to give a sense of incongruity due to a short-term presentation after the restart.

  In addition, presentation display (effect display) may be performed on the display device 41 in accordance with the operation of the accessory 96. Further, the type of the accessory 96 is not limited to that shown in FIG. 115, and any type may be used. Further, although the accessory 96 is lowered and overlapped with the display device 41, it may be in any direction such as rising or moving in a diagonal direction. Moreover, you may make it perform the separate display which overlaps in front of the effect display instead of the accessory 96. FIG. Further, the timer accessory 95 described above is not an accessory but may be displayed on the display device 41.

  FIG. 116 shows an example in which a continuous notice is performed as a pre-reading effect, in which the effect is produced in a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games executed before the special figure fluctuation display game based on a specific start memory to be noticed. . In this example, when the start memory of the third special figure 1 variable display game is generated (t331) in the state where the continuous notice is not executed, the result of the pre-reading process for the third start memory, In the special figure variation display game based on the third start memory, it is found that a specific reach effect is executed and the result is a big hit. It is decided to do.

  In addition, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed when the execution of the continuous notice is decided is a small hit, and the special variable based on the specific start-up memory is determined from the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game. It has been found that the special figure 2 variable display game stops during the execution of the FIG. 1 variable display game. That is, it has been found that interruption of the special figure 1 variable display game subject to continuous notice occurs.

  If it is clear that the special figure 2 variable display game will not stop by the end of the special figure 1 variable display game based on a specific start memory, or if the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed, The production contents are contents that suggest or notify the occurrence of a specific reach production, or contents that suggest or notify that the result is a big hit. However, since it has been found that the special figure 1 variable display game based on the specific start memory is interrupted here, the special figure 1 variable display game that can be executed before the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped. In the variation time (t332 to t333, t334 to t335), the effect related to the additional effect executed during the interruption is performed as a continuous notice. That is, it is suggested that an interruption occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game based on a specific start memory. Here, since the effect that the lover character 93 appears as an additional effect executed during the interruption is performed, the effect that the lover character 93 appears in the continuous notice is performed.

  If an additional effect related to the effect to be interrupted is selected and executed as the content of the additional effect that is executed during the interruption, the effect related to the additional effect to be selected is continuously performed. By performing in the advance notice, it is possible to suggest an effect to be executed in addition to the occurrence of interruption. In addition, when a predetermined additional effect is executed regardless of the effect that is interrupted as the content of the additional effect that is executed during the interruption, an interruption may occur by performing an effect related to the additional effect Will be suggested only in the continuous notice. Moreover, you may make it perform the production | presentation which suggests that interruption like FIG.116 (a)-(d) generate | occur | produces when interruption does not generate | occur | produce (what is called a gasse effect).

[Change interruption setting processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the variable interruption setting process shown in FIG. 117 is performed instead of the variable interruption setting process shown in FIG. In this variation interruption setting process, if the special figure 2 side is not a big hit (step C307; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a freeze display setting of the changing effect of the decorative special figure 1 is performed (step C411). In this setting, freeze display, which is a series of effects until the effect that is being executed stops and becomes pale, is set. In addition, the stop of the timekeeping of the timer accessory 95 is also set. Thereafter, display setting of the superimposed video for freeze effect is performed (step C412), and the variation interruption setting process is terminated. In this setting, a superimposed image, which is a separate additional effect performed in front of the interrupted effect, is set.

  Also, if the special figure 1 side is not a big hit (step C312; N), that is, if it is a small hit, freeze display setting of the changing effect of the decorative special figure 2 is performed (step C413). Furthermore, the display setting of the superimposed video for freeze effect is performed (step C414), and the variation interruption setting process is terminated.

  By such processing, as shown in FIGS. 114 (d) and 114 (e), the interrupted effect is displayed in a suspended state (freeze display) as a pale display, and is superimposed on the front of the interrupted effect and separately provided. An additional effect will be performed (display of a superimposed image). Further, the time measurement by the timer accessory 95 is also stopped.

[Variation restart setting processing]
Also, instead of the change restart setting process shown in FIG. 110, the change restart setting process shown in FIG. 118 is performed. In this variation restart setting process, the processes of steps C331 to C341 are performed before the determination of whether or not the power failure recovery display is being performed (steps C335 and C340). If it is medium, it is overwritten with the setting of the reduced symbol, so the processing from step C331 to C341 is substantially the same as the content shown in FIG.

  If the power failure recovery display is not in progress (step C335), it is determined whether the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (step C421). When the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (step C421; Y), the suspended effect is resumed (step C422), and the fluctuation resumption setting process is terminated. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 114 (f) to 114 (h), the production continues.

  If the remaining fluctuation time is not equal to or longer than the predetermined time (step C421; N), the display of the restart effect using the accessory and the setting of the accessory driving is performed (step C423), and the change restart setting process is terminated. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 115C to 115E, an effect accompanied by driving of the accessory 95 is performed. Similar processing is also performed when the special figure 2 variable display game is resumed (steps C424 to C426). That is, the effect mode after resumption is set according to the execution time from the resumption to the end of the suspended special figure variation display game.

  Here, when the remaining fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (steps C421, 424; Y), the effect that was interrupted is simply restarted. You may make it perform the effect which shows. Since the production is resumed after the special gaming state for a certain period of time is executed, the player may have forgotten the content of the production before the interruption. Can be made.

  The effects that show the contents of the effects that were executed before the interruption include effects that display the effect until the interruption by fast-forwarding after performing the rewind display, effects that display the effect until the interruption in a digest, etc. Can be mentioned. When performing an effect indicating the content of the effect performed before the interruption at the time of resumption, settings are made in steps C422 and C425. As the setting, for example, a rewind range and a fast-forward playback speed are set. In addition, an effect indicating the content of the effect executed before the interruption is performed at a predetermined time (for example, during ending) before the end of the special gaming state, and the effect is performed from the point of interruption at the time of resumption. Also good.

[Pre-reading design command processing]
FIG. 119 shows the look-ahead design command processing (step C244) in the above-described received command analysis processing. In this prefetch symbol type command processing, the command is saved in the special symbol 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 1 holding number (step C441), the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C442), and the prefetch symbol design is performed. System command processing ends. The reason why the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C442 is that the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command) are set (paired).

  As for special figure 2, since no start memory for holding off the execution of the special figure variable display game is generated, prefetching processing is not performed. Therefore, here, only the prefetch result regarding the start memory of the special figure variable display game is shown. Processing is performed. Of course, when the start memory for deferring the execution of the special figure variation display game for the special figure 2 is generated, the command is saved according to the special figure type.

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
FIG. 120 shows the look-ahead variation command processing (step C246) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this prefetch fluctuation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not a prefetch fluctuation command is waiting to be received (step C451). Here, when there is a prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag set in the above-mentioned prefetch symbol system command processing, it is determined that reception is awaiting. If the prefetch fluctuation command reception is not awaited (step C451; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait is in progress (step C451; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C452).

  Thereafter, in the processes of steps C453 to C456, a process of converting the prefetch fluctuation command (prefetch fluctuation pattern command) received from the game control apparatus 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control apparatus 300 is performed. First, a process (step C453) of setting a prefetch fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of symbols held in the latest hold information is performed (step C453). A MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set according to the information of FIG. 1 only and the current number of reservations of the special figure type.

  Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the in-sub-prefetch variation command MODE corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE is acquired (step C454). Further, a prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (step C455), and the sub-in-prefetch conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the prefetch variation command is acquired (step C456).

  The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but since the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE vary depending on the number of holds at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of prior judgment and the start of the special figure fluctuation display game The determination result may differ depending on the determination of time. Therefore, in order to enable easy and reliable processing of the pre-reading notice effect without being influenced by the number of holds at the time of determination, MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and at the time of determination It can be handled in common regardless of the number of holds. For example, there is a possibility of a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation without reach and a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation. It is converted into MODE divided according to matters to be considered in the setting of the prefetching notice effect, so that the process of the prefetching notice effect can be performed easily and reliably.

  In addition, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the latter-half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holds at the time of determination. However, for example, even in the case of normal reach, there are various aspects of the same type of reach, such as the case where the final stop symbol is set to the stop that stops one frame before the reach symbol, the stop that stops one frame ahead, and the winning case. Since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide. For this reason, the number of ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is converted to the same ACT, thereby reducing the number and reducing the processing load such as the check in the pre-reading notice effect processing.

  Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C457). If neither MODE nor ACT after conversion is other than 0 (step C457; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated because of an abnormal command value. On the other hand, if the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C457; Y), the converted command is the latest hold information, the prefetch change command area corresponding to the hold number (here, the special figure 1 prefetch change command area). ) (Step C458), and prefetch command consistency check processing (step C459) for determining whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal or not is performed.

  If the command combination is not normal as a result of the prefetch command matching check process (step C459) (step C460; N), the prefetch fluctuation command process is terminated. On the other hand, if the command combination is normal (step C460; Y), a prefetch lottery process (step C461) for lottery execution of the prefetch notice effect is performed to determine whether a prefetch notice effect is generated (step C462).

  If no prefetching notice effect is generated (step C462; N), the prefetching variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, when the prefetching notice effect is generated (step C462; Y), is the prefetching notice effect that is generated (that is, the prefetching notice effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C461)) immediately started? Is determined (step C463). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. An effect that does not start immediately is a pre-reading notice effect that is performed during the execution of a special figure fluctuation display game, which produces a specific effect or reach state continuously over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games. For example, an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during the display, a hold change notice for changing the display mode of the decoration start memory display at a timing later than the current time, and the like. The timing of starting the execution of such an effect that does not start immediately is that the special figure fluctuation display game is ended if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, and the execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game is started. Applicable timing.

  If the effect is not to start immediately (step C463; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. In this case, a notice is set at the start of a special figure change display game that executes a prefetch notice effect. On the other hand, if the effect is to start immediately (step C463; Y), a display corresponding to the selected prefetching notice effect is set (step C464), and the prefetching variation command processing is terminated.

[Pre-fetch lottery processing]
FIG. 121 shows the prefetch lottery process (step C461) in the prefetch fluctuation command process described above. In this prefetch lottery process, first, it is determined whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed (step C481). The case where the prefetch lottery can be executed is, for example, a case where another prefetch notice effect is not being executed. This condition can be arbitrarily set.

  When the prefetch lottery cannot be executed (step C481; N), the prefetch lottery process is terminated. If the pre-read lottery can be executed (step C481; Y), all pre-read control areas are cleared to 0 (step C482), and the latest hold special figure (the same type as the hold to be processed (in this case special) 1)) is loaded (step C483).

  Next, a prefetch change combination confirmation process (step C484) for confirming whether or not the content of the variation based on each hold (special figure variation display game) can execute the prefetch notice effect is performed from the prefetch result of each hold, and the prefetch notice is performed. It is determined whether or not the combination is a variation that can produce an effect (step C485). If it is not a combination of changes that can perform the prefetching notice effect (step C485; N), the prefetching lottery process is terminated. When it is not a combination of fluctuations that can perform a pre-reading notice effect, a hold that is digested before a hold subject to processing is digested before a reach effect with a higher degree of reliability or a hold subject to processing This is the case when a big hit is made by holding, or when there is a possibility that an inconsistency in the production may occur if a pre-reading notice production is performed. This condition can be arbitrarily set.

  On the other hand, if it is a combination of fluctuations that can perform the pre-reading notice effect (step C485; Y), the pre-read lottery group address table corresponding to the pre-read symbol command of the latest hold (hold for processing) is acquired (step C486). Based on the acquired prefetch lottery group address table, a prefetch lottery group table corresponding to the ACT of the prefetch variation command is obtained (step C487). The case of a combination of fluctuations that can perform the pre-reading notice effect is a case where all the holds that are digested before the hold to be processed are shifted without reach.

  The look-ahead symbol command referred to in step C486 includes a determination result that can identify the result and the probability state that brings about the result, that is, “disengagement in either low probability state or high probability state”, “low probability state and high probability state” Either of them is a big hit or a big hit only in a high probability state. Based on this information, the prefetch lottery group address table is acquired.

  In the prefetch lottery group table acquired based on the prefetch lottery group address table in step C487, the type of prefetch notice effect that can be executed and the selection probability are defined. The table selected in the case of “big hit only in the game” does not include a specific advance notice effect that is an effect for definite notification of the big hit. This is because the specific gaming state may end and the probability state may change from the high probability state to the low probability state when the pre-reading notice effect for the first start memory is performed. In other words, the first start memory that is “big hit only in a high probability state” was a big hit at the start of the pre-reading notice effect, but it would be lost due to a change in the probability state, so the big hit is confirmed. The specific advance notice effect, which is an effect to be notified, is not performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired address is undefined data (step C488). If the acquired address is undefined data (step C488; Y), the prefetching lottery process is terminated with no prefetching notice effect. If the acquired address is not undefined data (step C488; N), random number lottery processing (prefetching notice lottery processing) for lottery of presence / absence of execution of prefetching notice effect and type of effect is performed (step C489). As a result of the random number lottery process (step C489), when the prefetch notice effect is not performed (step C490; N), the prefetch lottery process ends. On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice effect is performed (step C490; Y), the type of the pre-reading effect changes the display mode of the decoration start memory display of the memory display unit 83, thereby suggesting a corresponding pre-read result of the start memory or It is determined whether it is a pending change notice to be notified (step C491).

  If it is a pending change notice (step C491), the execution flag of the determined prefetch effect is set (step C499), and the prefetch lottery process is terminated. If it is not a pending change notice (step C491), that is, if the type of pre-reading effect is a continuous notice that produces effects over a plurality of special figure variable display games, is the special figure 2 variable display game running? Is determined (step C492).

  When the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step C492; N), the process proceeds to step C498. In this case, even if the continuous notice is executed from now on, it is not interrupted by the derivation of the special result in the special figure 2 variable display game. Therefore, it executes without changing the continuous notice determined by the lottery. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed (step C492; Y), the remaining time until the end of the fluctuation is obtained as a result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step C493), and the target hold start The time and the fluctuation time of the target hold are acquired (step C494), and it is determined whether the game before the prefetch target hold is interrupted (step C495).

  Here, the time until the start of the target hold in step C494 is the time until the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched, and the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game currently being executed. This is the total of the time and the time (fluctuation time and stop time) for executing the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory that is consumed until the prefetch target suspension. The time for executing the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory digested until the prefetch target hold and the change time of the target hold can be grasped based on the prefetch result.

  Then, in step C495, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game ends and the special result is derived before the time until the target suspension start. Further, in step C496, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends after the time until the target hold start and before the total time of the time until the target hold start and the fluctuation time of the target hold. Determine whether to derive special results. That is, it is determined whether or not a special result is derived in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game during execution of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start-up memory to be prefetched.

  When the game before the prefetch target hold is interrupted (step C495; Y), the prefetch lottery process is terminated. In this case, it is set not to execute the prefetch notice (step C500), and the prefetch lottery process is terminated. That is, in this case, since the continuity of the continuous notice is lost because the special figure change display game is interrupted during the continuous notice, the continuous notice is not executed.

  If the game before the prefetch target hold is not interrupted (step C495; N), it is determined whether the prefetch target hold game is interrupted (step C496). When the pre-read target hold game is not interrupted (step C496; N), the pre-read effect number, which is the number of executions of the special figure variable display game for executing the pre-read notice effect based on the latest hold information (process target hold information), is set. It is set (step C498), the execution flag of the determined prefetch notice effect is set (step C499), and the prefetch lottery process is terminated. In this case, the continuous notice determined by lottery is executed without change.

  When the pre-read target pending game is interrupted (step C496; Y), the type of the pre-reading effect is changed to an effect suggesting interruption (step C497), and the process proceeds to step C498. In this case, as shown in FIG. 116, an effect related to the additional effect executed during the interruption is executed as a continuous notice.

  In the calculation of the time until the target hold start, the time for executing the special figure variation display game based on the start memory digested until the prefetch target hold is indeterminate, but when the special figure fluctuation display game is executed The determination is made by calculating the minimum time and the maximum time that can be set in the above. In Step C495, the maximum time is used as the time until the target suspension start. In step C496, it is determined whether or not the pre-read target pending game is interrupted at either the minimum time or the maximum time. In the case where the pre-read target pending game is not interrupted if it is the minimum time in Step C496, but the pre-read target hold game is interrupted if it is the maximum time, the continuous notice determined by the lottery is not changed. However, it may be a continuous notice related to the additional effect executed during the interruption, or the continuous notice may not be executed.

  In addition, when executing the continuous notice, if the variation time for the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory that is consumed before the pre-reading target suspension is set to a predetermined value, the continuous notice is more clearly indicated. The production can be set.

  In addition, in the above description, after receiving the decoration special figure 1 interruption command and the decoration special figure 2 interruption command, the freeze effect which is a series of productions from the execution of the effect being stopped to the light display is started. However, if the timing at which the interruption occurs based on the pre-read result is known in advance, the freeze display is started before the timing is reached, and the decoration special figure 1 interruption command and the decoration special figure 2 interruption are started. You may make it make it the state which the production which was completely performed at the timing which received the command stopped. By doing in this way, the start of interruption by derivation of the special result coincides with the stop timing of the effect, and the effect of the game can be improved with a more uncomfortable effect.

  In addition, in FIG. 116, the possibility of interruption is suggested by a continuous notice over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games. After the temporary stop in the result mode, the re-variable display which starts the variable display again is performed once or more, so that a so-called pseudo-continuous variable display mode is performed to suggest the possibility of interruption in all or part of each variable display. You may do it.

  From the above, the result of the variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of the game ball at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37) is a special result. In this case, a game that can generate a special game state that can give a player a game value by converting the variable winning device (the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39) from the closed state to the open state. In the machine, the start winning opening includes a first starting winning opening 36 and a second starting winning opening 37 disposed at a position different from the first starting winning opening 36. The first variation display means (special figure 1 display 51, display device 41) capable of displaying the first variation display game based on the winning of the game ball and the second based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37 Second variation display means capable of displaying a two variation display game (special figure 2 display) 52, based on the winning of the game ball in the display device 41) and the first start winning opening 36, the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information may be determined at the start of the first variation display game. First determining means (game control device 100) that can be, and first variation display game execution control means (game control) capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game based on the determination result of the first determining means Device 100) and the second variation display game result and variation mode information can be determined at the start of the second variation display game based on the winning of the game ball in the second start winning opening 37. 2 determination means (game control apparatus 100) and second variation display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game based on the determination result of the second determination means. And the first variation display When the execution control of one variation display game is controlled by one variation display game execution control unit of the game execution control unit or the second variation display game execution control unit, the other variation display game execution control unit When the other variable display game for which execution control is being performed has a special result, one of the variable display games is interrupted and then the special game state based on the other variable display game is terminated. Resumption control means (game control device 100) capable of executing resumption control for resuming the variable display game, display device 41 for displaying effect display relating to the game, and effect control means (effect for controlling display on the display device 41) Control device 300), and when the resumption control is performed, the effect control means displays an effect display corresponding to one of the variable display games to be interrupted. In the case of displaying before the interruption, the production display is interrupted by stopping the production display by the suspension, and a separate production display is displayed in front of the production display that has been stopped. With the resumption of one of the variable display games, the display of the separate effect display is terminated and the interrupted effect is resumed.

  Therefore, there is no contradiction in production, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring even when simultaneous variation is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means sets the effect after resumption according to the execution time from the resumption to the end of one interrupted variable display game.

  Therefore, there is no contradiction in production, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring even when simultaneous variation is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means can execute an effect that suggests that an interruption will occur when it is determined that an interruption will occur based on information on the currently running variable display game or information on the variable display game to be executed in the future. It will be.

  Therefore, there is no contradiction in production, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring even when simultaneous variation is performed.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the content of the continuous notice that is the pre-reading effect is changed when interruption occurs.

  In the gaming machine of this modification, a variation pattern table shown in FIG. 122 is used instead of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. In this variation pattern table, a variation pattern with a variation time of 5000 ms can be selected when a small hit is generated in a low probability state for the special figure 2 variation display game. For this reason, the special figure 2 variable display game which is a small hit started after the start of the continuous notice for the special figure 1 variable display game is terminated and interrupted before the end of the special figure 1 variable display game to be notified. May occur. In such a case, the content of the continuous notice is changed.

  FIG. 123 shows an example in which the content of the continuous notice is changed. In this example, first, the special figure 1 variable display game executed two times before the special figure 1 variable display game (t455 to t457) to be notified is started (t451). In this special figure 1 variable display game, execution of continuous notice is determined, and as shown in (b) and (c), the effect of continuous notice is performed. This effect of continuous notice suggests or informs the expectation level of the later special-figure display game according to the content of the display that appears when the character breaks the ball. Here, as shown in FIG. By performing the “once” display, it is suggested that the next special drawing variation display game can be expected.

  During the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t452). This special figure 2 variable display game results in a small hit, and it has been found that the variable time ends during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game that is the subject of notice (t455), and later The special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (t455 to t456). Since the continuity of the continuous notice may be lost based on the start of such a special figure 2 variable display game, the content of the presentation is changed and the continuous notice is ended earlier than planned.

  In this example, the contents of the effect of the continuous notice performed in the special figure fluctuation display game (t453 to t454) immediately before the special figure fluctuation display game to be noticed are changed. In the original schedule, the special figure change display game immediately before the special figure change display game to be notified was scheduled to show the content as shown in (c), but this content was replaced with (g). As shown in the drawing, the content is changed to a content indicating that the degree of expectation to be displayed as “cass !!” is low, and the continuous notice is ended in this special figure variation display game.

  The effect contents as shown in (g) are effect contents frequently used in the so-called Gasse effect that is performed when there is no start memory for executing the special figure variation display game as a special result. By doing so, the continuous notice can be finished without a sense of incongruity. Instead of completing or ending the continuous notice, it may be changed to an effect that enters a dedicated effect mode, and the dedicated effect mode may be set during interruption.

  Note that, as shown in (i), the continuous notice may be terminated with a display that suggests the result of the special figure variation display game to be noticed. Alternatively, the continuous notice may be terminated with an effect that suggests that the interruption will occur, and the continuous notice that suggests or reports the special result or the variation pattern may be converted into a continuous notice that suggests interruption.

[Variable command processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the variable command process shown in FIG. 124 is performed instead of the variable command process shown in FIG. In this variable command processing, after performing the processing of steps C351 to C367, it is determined whether or not the special figure type is special figure 2 (step C511). If the special figure type is not special figure 2 (step C511; N), that is, if the special figure variable display game to be started is a special figure variable display game, the variable command processing is terminated.

  If the special figure type is special figure 2 (step C511; Y), that is, if the special figure fluctuation display game to be started is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is the prefetch effect being executed? Is determined (step C512). If the pre-reading effect is not being executed (step C512; N), the variable command process is terminated. If the prefetch effect is being executed (step C512; Y), it is determined whether the prefetch effect is a pending change notice (step C513).

  If the pre-reading effect is a pending change notice (step C513; Y), the variable command processing is terminated. In this case, even if the interruption occurs, there is no inconvenience such as loss of continuity, so the production is not changed. If the pre-reading effect is not a hold change notice (step C513; N), that is, if it is a continuous notice, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is obtained as a result of the change (step C514), and the time until the target hold starts. Then, the target pending fluctuation time is acquired (step C515). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an interruption before the end of the pre-read target hold game (step C516).

  The result and time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be grasped from the fluctuation command and the symbol command received this time. In addition, the time until the target hold start is the time until the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched, and the remaining time of the currently running special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the prefetching This is the total time for executing the special figure variation display game based on the start memory that is consumed until the subject is suspended. The time for executing the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory digested until the prefetch target hold and the change time of the target hold can be grasped based on the prefetch result.

  As a result of the determination based on these pieces of information, if there is no interruption by the end of the pre-read target suspension game (step C516: N), the variable command processing is terminated. If there is an interruption until the end of the pre-read target hold game (step C516; Y), it is determined whether the production replacement is in time (step C517).

  The period in which the effect replacement is in time is a period before the timing at which the replacement target display is performed in the special figure fluctuation display game immediately before the special figure fluctuation display game in which the interruption occurs. In the effect of the continuous notice shown in FIG. 123, until the replacement target is displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game that is executed immediately before the special figure 1 variable display game that is the target of notification, (g) It is a period before the timing.

  If this effect replacement is not in time (step C517; N), the variable command processing is terminated. In this case, since the inconvenience occurs such that the replacement is impossible or the effect is inconsistent even if the replacement is performed, the continuous notice proceeds as originally scheduled. When the production replacement is in time (step C517; Y), the content of the prefetching production is changed (step C518). Thereafter, the number of prefetch effects is reset according to the changed prefetch effect (step C519), the execution flag is reset according to the changed prefetch effect (step C520), and the variable command processing is terminated. By resetting the number of pre-reading effects and the execution flag, the end timing of the continuous notice can be made earlier than originally scheduled.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of this modified example, the processing of FIG. 119 to FIG. 121 described above is performed as the processing related to setting of the prefetching effect, and if it is clear that the interruption occurs at the start of the prefetching effect, continuous notice is given. An effect that does not execute or suggests interruption is set.

  In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display game immediately before the special figure fluctuation display game in which the interruption occurs, the continuous notice is ended when it is earlier than the timing when the replacement target is displayed. You may make it complete | finish a continuous notice in the special figure fluctuation display game to generate | occur | produce. If you want to end the continuous notice in the special figure fluctuation display game where the interruption occurs, compare the timing of the display of the replacement target in the special figure fluctuation display game where the interruption occurs with the timing of the occurrence of the interruption. If the display is ahead, the replacement is performed and the continuous notice is ended. Further, if the interruption is ahead, the continuous notice may be performed as scheduled, or the continuous notice may be ended by the interruption. In other words, it is possible to set so that the presentation is replaced and the continuous notice is ended after executing the replaced effect if it is before the execution timing of the last effect to be replaced before the interruption occurs.

  From the above, the result of the variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of the game ball at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37) is a special result. In this case, a game that can generate a special game state that can give a player a game value by converting the variable winning device (the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39) from the closed state to the open state. In the machine, the start winning opening includes a first starting winning opening 36 and a second starting winning opening 37 disposed at a position different from the first starting winning opening 36. The first variation display means (special figure 1 display 51, display device 41) capable of displaying the first variation display game based on the winning of the game ball and the second based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37 Second variation display means capable of displaying a two variation display game (special figure 2 display) 52, display device 41), first start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36, Based on the first start memory stored in the one start storage means, the first determination means (game) capable of determining the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information at the start of the first variation display game Control device 100), first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game based on the determination result of the first determination means, and first start Pre-determination means (game control device 100) for determining the first start memory stored in the storage means before the execution of the first variation display game based on the first start memory, and the game to the second start winning opening 37 Based on the winning of the ball, Based on the determination result of the second determination means (game control device 100) capable of determining the result of the variation display game and the variation mode information at the start of the second variation display game. Second variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game, effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling effects in the game, and first variation When the execution control of one variation display game is being controlled by either one of the display game execution control means or the second variation display game execution control means, the other variation display game execution control means is A special game based on the other variation display game by interrupting one variation display game when the other variation display game for which execution control is being performed results in a special result. Resumption control means (game control device 100) capable of executing resumption control for resuming one of the variable display games that has been interrupted after the state has ended, and the effect control means provides a result of the determination by the prior determination means. Based on the determination result of the specific first start memory, it is possible to execute a continuous effect that suggests a plurality of variable display games up to the first variable display game based on the specific first start memory. When it is determined that the resumption control by the resumption control means is performed for the first variation display game, the continuous effect can be ended before the first variation display game is interrupted. .

  Therefore, there is no contradiction in production, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring even when simultaneous variation is performed.

  In addition, when it is determined that the resumption control by the resumption control unit is performed for the first variation display game during execution of the continuous production, the production control unit determines the first variation display game for which the resumption control is performed. It is possible to end the continuous production by the start.

  Therefore, there is no contradiction in production, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring even when simultaneous variation is performed.

  In addition, a start memory display means (production control device 300) for displaying a start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored in the first start memory means in a one-to-one correspondence is provided. It is possible to make a hold change notice, which is a notice suggesting the determination result of the corresponding pre-determining means for the first start memory, and the hold change notice is continued even when restart control is performed by the restart control means. And can be executed.

  Therefore, by continuing the pending change notice that is not affected by the interruption, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the collective display device 50 includes an interruption display unit 79 that indicates whether or not the special figure variation display game is interrupted.

  FIG. 125 shows the collective display device 50 in the gaming machine of this modification. D1 to D18 are the same as those in FIG. D19 and D20 are an interruption display section 79 indicating whether or not the special figure variation display game is interrupted. As shown in FIG. 125B, the interruption display unit 79 is in a state where neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted. State, Special Figure 2 Indicates either the state where the variable display game is interrupted.

  FIG. 126 shows a display example on the collective display device 50 when the special figure variation display game is interrupted. In this example, as shown in FIG. 126 (a), both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are executed, and the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 change. The display is done. In addition, the interruption display unit 79 is in a state of being extinguished.

  Then, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, a small hit is derived and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted. At this time, as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the special figure 1 display 51 derives the result of the small hit, and the special figure 2 display is in a state of continuing the variable display. In addition, during the interruption, the interruption display unit 79 displays that the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. This display state continues until the end of the special game state.

  After that, when the special game state ends, the suspended special figure 2 variable display game is resumed. The special figure 1 variable display game starts a new special figure variable display game based on the first start memory. As a result, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 perform variable display. Further, in the interruption display section 79, when the special figure 2 variable display game is resumed, all are turned off to indicate that they are not interrupted. During the interruption of the special figure variation display game, an interruption signal may be output as external information, and information for determining which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is interrupted is output together. May be.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modified example, the condition for stopping forcibly differs from the interruption result.

  FIG. 127 shows an example of a pattern using a different control method depending on the situation regarding how to control the other special figure fluctuation display game based on the special result derived in one special figure fluctuation display game. showed that. Here, the control method 1 is a control method in which the other special figure variation display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped based on the special result derived in one special figure variation display game. The control method 2 is a control method in which a special result is derived in one special figure variation display game and the other special figure variation display game is interrupted and resumed after the special game state is ended.

  Pattern 1 shown in FIG. 127A is a pattern for setting a control method in accordance with the special figure type. In this pattern, when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped by the result (control method 1). On the other hand, when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and resumed after the special game state is ended (control method 2). ).

  In particular, when a big win is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped with the result (control method 1), so that the game is started when the high probability state is started. The game can proceed in an advantageous manner for the player. In other words, if the control method 2 is used in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game having a long variation time started at the low probability state at the start of the high probability state is resumed. It will be difficult to start the game. In the high probability state, it is a period in which the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls by shortening the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game and causing the special results to occur frequently. As a result, the start of a new special figure 2 variable display game is accelerated, and the game proceeds advantageously for the player.

  Pattern 2 shown in FIG. 127 (b) is a pattern for setting a control method according to a special result. In this pattern, for example, when the first special result (big hit) is derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped (control method 1). . On the other hand, when the second special result (small hit) is derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, the other special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted and resumed after the special game state is ended (control). Method 2). Note that the control method may be selected in consideration of the special figure type.

  Pattern 3 shown in FIG. 127C is a pattern for setting the control method according to the hit type. For example, when the big hit symbol 1A or the small hit symbol 1a is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result (control method 1). On the other hand, when the big hit symbol 1B or the small hit symbol 1b is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted and resumed after the special game state is ended (control method 2). ). The control method may be set depending on whether the first special result or the second special result is used.

  Pattern 4 shown in FIG. 127 (d) is a pattern in which a control method is set according to the gaming state and the special figure type. When a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly discontinued and stopped with the result (control method 1). On the other hand, when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and resumed after the special gaming state ends (control method 2). In the specific gaming state (during ST), the control method 2 is used regardless of the special figure type or the special result type.

  In this example, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of disengagement so that the player is disadvantaged, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game. I am doing so. In addition, for the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main player in the normal gaming state, the special result is not changed by the forced stop. In addition, since the specific game state is advantageous to the player, the special result will not be changed by any forced stop for any special figure fluctuation display game, and the player can maximize the profit. So that you can get In consideration of the profit balance with the game store, the special figure 1 variable display game that is not the main player in the specific gaming state is forcibly stopped to prevent the player from gaining excessive profits. Also good. Further, the control method may be set only by the gaming state, for example, only the control method 1 may be set in the normal gaming state and only the control method 2 may be set in the specific gaming state.

  Pattern 5 shown in FIG. 127 (e) is a pattern in which a control method is set according to the gaming state, special figure type, and special result type. In the normal gaming state, the second special result is derived in one of the special figure variation display games so that the special result of the other special figure variation display game is not changed to an outlier result. Further, in the specific gaming state, the first special result is derived in one special figure variation display game, so that the special result of the other special figure variation display game is not changed to the outlier result. Increase the value of special results.

  The pattern of the control method is not limited to those described here, and other patterns may be used. In addition, as the control method selection parameters, the special figure type, the special result type, the gaming state, and the like are described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other parameters may be considered. Examples of other parameters include the number of games since the end of the special gaming state, calendar information such as date, day of the week, and current time, and achievement of certain conditions in the game such as occurrence of outlier reach a predetermined number of times.

  When selecting the control method as shown in FIG. 127, in the special-figure 1 fluctuation processing shown in FIG. 63, instead of determining whether special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y631), it depends on the conditions. Then, the process of selecting whether to stop or end is performed. If interrupt is selected, the process proceeds to step Y632 to perform processing such as setting a special figure 2 game interruption flag, and if end is selected, the process proceeds to step Y635 to stop the special figure 2 variable display game. Perform the process.

  Also, in the special-figure 2 fluctuation process shown in FIG. 64, when special figure 1 is also being executed (step Y660; Y), a process of selecting whether to interrupt or end depending on the condition is performed. To. If interruption is selected, the process proceeds to step Y661 to perform processing such as setting the special figure 1 game interruption flag. If the end is selected, the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped as in steps Y621 to Y626 shown in FIG.

  In other words, after the game control device 100 ends the one variation display game as a result other than the special result and interrupts one variation display game and ends the special game state based on the other variation display game. Selection means is provided for selecting and executing either of the resumption control for resuming one of the suspended variation display games based on a predetermined condition.

  From the above, one of the fluctuation display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) and the second fluctuation display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) is changed by one fluctuation display game execution control means. When execution control of a display game (special figure fluctuation display game) is performed, when the other fluctuation display game whose execution control is performed by the other fluctuation display game execution control means has a special result, Control for ending the variable display game as a result other than the special result, and one variable display game that was interrupted after the special game state based on the other variable display game was terminated Selection means (game control device 100) for selecting and executing either of the restart control for restarting the game based on a predetermined condition.

  The selection means is controlled by the second variation display game execution control means when execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is performed by the first variation display game execution control means. When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) in which the game is performed has a special result, after the first variation display game is interrupted and the special game state based on the second variation display game is ended When the second variation display game execution control unit performs execution control of the second variation display game, the first variation display game is resumed by selecting and executing the resumption control for resuming the first variation display game that has been interrupted. When the first variation display game whose execution control is being performed by the game execution control means has a special result, an end control for ending the second variation display game as a result other than the special result is selected and executed. The it has to so that.

  The selection means selects and executes an end control for ending one of the variable display games as a result other than the special result when the other variable display game has a first special result, and executes the other variable display game. When the game results in the second special result, the resumption control for resuming one of the variable display games after interrupting one of the variable display games and ending the special game state based on the other variable display game. Will be selected and executed.

  In addition, when the selection means is in the specific gaming state, the execution control is performed by the first variation display game execution control means when the second variation display game execution control means performs execution control of the second variation display game. The second variation that was interrupted after the second variation display game was interrupted and the special gaming state based on the first variation display game was terminated when the first variation display game in which the game is performed has a special result This means that the resumption control for resuming the display game is selected and executed.

  In addition, the variation mode information of the first variation display game and the second variation display game includes information regarding the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and the first variation display game and the second variation display game. For each of these, measurement means (game control device 100) that starts measuring the variation time in response to the start of the variation display game and ends the variation time measurement of the variation display game when the variation time has elapsed. And the first variation display game execution control means and the second variation display game execution control means end the variation display of the variation display game being executed in response to the measurement means ending the measurement of the variation time. When the restart control is selected by the selection unit, the measurement unit is configured so that the one variation display game is based on the fact that the other variation display game has a special result. Of interrupting the measurement of the variation time, so that the special game state based on the other of the variable display games so as to resume the measurement of the variation time of one variation display game that was interrupted at the end of completion.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is configured to give a notice about a special figure variation display game that is suspended during the special gaming state.

  FIG. 128 shows an example in which a notice for a special figure variation display game interrupted during the special game state is given. In this example, during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game that is a small hit in the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game that is a small hit is started (t471). A two-variable display game is being executed simultaneously.

  The variation display end timing (t472) determined at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game is earlier than the fluctuation display end timing (t474) determined at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. The one-variable display game is finished, and the result of the small hit is derived (t472). And with the derivation of the small hit in this special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted. After the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game is over, it becomes a stop time for displaying the result (t472 to t473), and when this stop time is over, the special game state based on the small hit result derived in the special figure 1 variable display game Is started (t473).

  In the special game state based on this small hit, a notice about the suspended special figure 2 variable display game is given. In this special game state, the display as shown in FIG. In the large part of the display area, a small hit effect is performed. Here, although details are omitted, an effect display such as a moving image or a still image is performed. Further, in the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game display section 81 at the upper left of the display area, the small hit result derived in the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is displayed. Also, the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game display section 82 at the lower right of the display area displays the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In this example, the decoration special figure 2 variable display game is also displayed in such a manner that the three pieces of identification information are displayed in a variable manner.

  In the upper right part of the display area, a notification display 97 for suggesting or notifying the result of the suspended special figure 2 variable display game is displayed. In this example, as the notification display 97, a roulette in which a plurality of regions showing characters and figures for suggesting or notifying the result of the suspended special figure 2 variable display game are arranged in a circle is displayed. Then, after performing the scroll display in which the highlighting performed by setting the region as the specific color circulates in the circumferential direction for a predetermined time, the result display for stopping in a state where the one region is highlighted is performed. The result of the special figure 2 variable display game interrupted by the characters and graphics shown in the highlighted area is suggested or notified. (A) shows a state where the area where the character “O” is displayed is highlighted and is stopped and displayed, and the suspended special figure 2 variable display game may have a special result. It is high.

  Based on the end of the special game state, the suspended special figure 2 variable display game is resumed (t475). A new special figure 1 fluctuation display game is also started based on the first start memory. Here, since it is a normal gaming state, the effect on the display device 41 is the effect of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that is the main fluctuation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is the irregular fluctuation is the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation. Only the variable display is performed on the display game display unit 82.

  Further, the end timing of the variable display determined at the start of the new special figure 1 variable display game is later than the end timing (t476) of the variable display of the restarted special figure 2 variable display game. The variation display game is finished, and the result of the small hit is derived (t476). And with the derivation of the small hits in this special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted. After the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends, it becomes a stop time for displaying the result (t476 to t477), and when this stop time ends, the special game state based on the small hit result derived in the special figure 2 variable display game Is started (t477).

  Here, since the special-figure 1 variable display game that is the main fluctuation is interrupted, the effect on the special-figure 1 variable display game is continued as the effect on the effect device 41. The content of this effect is an effect including an additional effect as shown in FIG. 100, FIG. 101, FIG. 114, FIG. 115, etc., an effect of extending the variable display by the amount of the special game state, or the like. Of course, the notification display 97 as shown in (a) may be performed to suggest or notify the result of the suspended special figure 1 variable display game.

  Although the notification display 97 is performed on the display device 41, the notification display 97 may be performed on a sub display device that is a display device different from the display device 41. The sub display device is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by a plurality of light emitting members such as LEDs and lamps. In this case, for example, the suggestion or notification content in the notification display 97 is associated with each light emitting member, and the result corresponding to the light emitting member that is finally turned on as the result display becomes the suggestion or notification content in the notification display 97. To do. In addition, the notification display 97 may be performed using an operating accessory. Further, the form of the notification display 97 is not limited to that described above, and any form may be used as long as it can suggest or notify the result of the suspended special-figure display game. In addition, information other than the result, such as information on a variation pattern such as the contents of reach production, may be reported on the notification display 97.

  In addition, in the gaming machine of the first embodiment, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped by the result of disengagement. When the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted even when the display game is a big hit, the notification display 97 may be performed in the special game state based on the big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game. good.

  From the above, the effect control means (the effect control device 300), when the other special figure variation display game is interrupted based on the special result derived in one special figure variation display game, In the special game state executed based on the derivation of the special result in the figure fluctuation display game, the notification display 97 for suggesting or notifying information about the other special figure fluctuation display game being interrupted is performed. Become. Thereby, the player's expectation for the suspended special figure variation display game can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the special figure variation display game is interrupted, even if the result is derived immediately because the variation time after resumption is short, the player feels uncomfortable at the time of resumption by suggesting or informing the result in advance. It can be made not to have.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in appropriate combination.

  Further, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 36 1st starting prize opening (starting prize opening)
37 Second starting prize opening (starting prize opening)
38 First special variable prize device (variable prize device)
39 Second special variable prize device (variable prize device)
41 Display device (first variation display means, second variation display means)
51 Special figure 1 display (first variation display means)
52 Special figure 2 indicator (second variation display means)
100 Game control device (first determination means, first variation display game execution control means, second determination means, second variation display game execution control means, first start storage means, prior determination means, restart control means)
300 effect control device (effect control means, start memory display means)

Claims (3)

When the result of a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information variably based on the winning of a game ball at the starting winning opening results in a special result, the variable winning device is changed from the closed state to the open state to play the game In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state capable of giving value,
The start prize opening includes a first start prize opening and a second start prize opening arranged at a position different from the first start prize opening,
First variation display means capable of displaying a first variation display game based on winning of a game ball in the first start winning opening;
Second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game based on winning of a game ball in the second start winning opening;
First start storage means capable of storing a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number based on winning of a game ball in the first start winning opening;
Based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means, a first determination that can determine the result and the variation mode information of the first variation display game at the start of the first variation display game Means,
First variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game based on a determination result of the first determination means;
Pre-determination means for determining the first start memory stored in the first start storage means before the execution of the first variation display game based on the first start memory;
Second determination means capable of determining the result and the variation mode information of the second variation display game at the start of the second variation display game based on the winning of the game ball at the second start winning opening. When,
Second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game based on a determination result of the second determination means;
Production control means for controlling production in the game;
When one of the first variation display game execution control means and the second variation display game execution control means performs execution control of one variation display game, the other variation display game When the other variation display game whose execution is controlled by the game execution control means has the special result, the one variation display game is interrupted and the special game state based on the other variation display game is Resumption control means capable of executing resumption control for resuming the one variation display game that has been suspended after the completion,
The production control means includes
A continuous effect that suggests the determination result of the specific first start memory over a plurality of variable display games up to the first variable display game based on the specific first start memory based on the determination result of the prior determination means. Is possible and
During the execution of the continuous effect, if it is determined that the restart control by the restart control means is performed for the first variable display game, the continuous effect is ended before the interruption of the first variable display game. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of being made to play. The production control means includes
When it is determined that the resumption control by the resumption control means is performed for the first variation display game during the execution of the continuous effect, by the start of the first variation display game for which the resumption control is performed. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the continuous performance can be ended. A start memory display means for displaying a start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored in the first start memory means;
The start memory display means includes
It is possible to make a pending change notice that is a notice suggesting a determination result of the prior determination means for the first start memory corresponding to the start memory display,
3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the hold change notice can be continuously executed even when the restart control by the restart control unit is performed.